入出息念的讨论巴利
3. Ānāpānassatikathā
1. 计数章的解说巴利
1. Gaṇanavāravaṇṇanā
152 152. 现在,在“见论”之后所说的“入出息念论”,是对前所未说的义理的注释,已经接着来了。因为这部入出息念论,对于已经善巧了知邪见的过患、通过清除微细邪见而使心极为清净的人,为了如实通达而修定,就容易成就;而且在一切定的修习中,一切知菩萨在菩提树下,正是以这个定使心得等持、如实通达,所以这个定的修习是最主要的——因此它被放在“见论”之后来说。其中,对于修习以十六事为基础的入出息念定的人,生起的智超过二百种,这是智的计数总说;“八种障碍中的智”等,是智的计数分别说;从“哪些是八种障碍中的智”等开始,直到“这二十一种解脱乐中的智”为止,是对一切智的广释;结尾“修习以十六事为基础的入出息念定”等,是结语。以上,首先应如此了知巴利经文的次第。巴利
152. Idāni diṭṭhikathānantaraṃ kathitāya ānāpānassatikathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā anuppattā. Ayañhi ānāpānassatikathā diṭṭhikathāya suviditadiṭṭhādīnavassa micchādiṭṭhimalavisodhanena suvisuddhacittassa yathābhūtāvabodhāya samādhibhāvanā sukarā hoti, sabbasamādhibhāvanāsu ca sabbasabbaññubodhisattānaṃ bodhimūle imināva samādhinā samāhitacittānaṃ yathābhūtāvabodhato ayameva samādhibhāvanā padhānāti ca diṭṭhikathānantaraṃ kathitā. Tattha soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiṃ bhāvayato samadhikāni dve ñāṇasatāni uppajjantīti ñāṇagaṇanuddeso, aṭṭha paripanthe ñāṇānītiādi ñāṇagaṇananiddeso, katamāni aṭṭha paripanthe ñāṇānītiādi. Imāni ekavīsati vimuttisukhe ñāṇānītipariyantaṃ sabbañāṇānaṃ vitthāraniddeso, ante soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiṃ bhāvayatotiādi nigamananti evaṃ tāva pāḷivavatthānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这当中,关于“计数总说”的“计数部分”,先说“以十六事为基”:也就是以“长、短、体验全身、平静身行”为身随观的一组四法;以“体验喜、体验乐、体验心行、平静心行”为受随观的一组四法;以“体验心、令心欢喜、令心等持、令心解脱”为心随观的一组四法;以“随观无常、随观离贪、随观灭、随观弃舍”为法随观的一组四法。依这四组四法,共有十六种依处、立足处和所缘,所以叫“以十六事为基”。这就是那“以十六事为基”。不过在这里,是依复合词的方式省略了格尾。“入息”是指进入内部的风。“出息”是指向外出去的风。但有些人反过来讲。他们认为:已经出去的风才叫“出息”,因为在释义中忽略了字母中的长音,所以读作“入息”。于彼入出息中有念,对入息与出息的摄持之念,这就是“入出息念”;这是对摄持入息与出息之念的称呼。与入出息念相应的定,或者以入出息念为所缘的定,就是“入出息念定”。“修习”是指正在修习抉择分的人。“多出的”:意思是与超出部分一起进行的,也就是有超出的部分。这里的“ma”只是连接词。不过有些人说成“saṃadhikāni”。如果这样,就会变成“多出两百种智”,那是不合理的。因为这里应当是“多出二十的两百种智”。巴利
Tattha gaṇanuddese gaṇanavāre tāva soḷasavatthukanti dīghaṃ rassaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti kāyānupassanācatukkaṃ, pītipaṭisaṃvedī sukhapaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti vedanānupassanācatukkaṃ, cittapaṭisaṃvedī abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ samādahaṃ cittaṃ vimocayaṃ cittanti cittānupassanācatukkaṃ, aniccānupassī virāgānupassī nirodhānupassī paṭinissaggānupassīti dhammānupassanācatukkanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasa vatthūni patiṭṭhā ārammaṇāni assāti soḷasavatthuko. Taṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ. Samāsavasena panettha vibhattilopo kato. Ānanti abbhantaraṃ pavisanavāto. Apānanti bahinikkhamanavāto. Keci pana vipariyāyena vadanti. Apānañhi apetaṃ ānatoti apānanti vuccati, niddese (paṭi. ma. 1.160) pana nā-kārassa dīghattamajjhupekkhitvā āpānanti. Tasmiṃ ānāpāne sati ānāpānassati, assāsapassāsapariggāhikāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ānāpānassatiyā yutto samādhi, ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi. Bhāvayatoti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ bhāventassa. Samadhikānīti saha adhikena vattantīti samadhikāni, sātirekānīti attho. Ma-kāro panettha padasandhikaro. Keci pana ‘‘saṃadhikānī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sati dve ñāṇasatāniyeva adhikānīti āpajjati, taṃ na yujjati. Imāni hi vīsatiadhikāni dve ñāṇasatāni hontīti.
“障碍中的诸智”:指以障碍为所缘而生起的诸智。同样地,还有“助益中的诸智”和“随烦恼中的诸智”。“清净中的诸智”:“清净”的意思是使清净,因此心变得清净。那是什么?就是智。本来应该说“清净智”,但就像“闻所成智”等说法那样,这里说成“在清净中的诸智”。“具念而行者”:指具足念与正知而做事的人;属于这个具念而行者的诸智。“厌离智”:即成为厌离的诸智。“随顺厌离智”:指随顺于厌离的诸智。也有文本写作“随顺厌离者智”,意思是这些智具有随顺厌离,所以叫“随顺厌离者”。“厌离止息智”:即处于厌离止息中的诸智。“解脱乐中的诸智”:指与解脱乐相应的诸智。巴利
Paripanthe ñāṇānīti paripanthaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattañāṇāni. Tathā upakāre upakkilese ñāṇāni. Vodāne ñāṇānīti vodāyati, tena cittaṃ parisuddhaṃ hotīti vodānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Vodānañāṇānī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘sutamaye ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. mātikā 1.1; paṭi. ma. 1.1) viya ‘‘vodāne ñāṇānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sato sampajāno hutvā karotīti satokārī, tassa satokārissa ñāṇāni. Nibbidāñāṇānīti nibbidābhūtāni ñāṇāni. Nibbidānulomañāṇānīti nibbidāya anukūlāni ñāṇāni. Nibbidānulomiñāṇānītipi pāṭho, nibbidānulomo etesaṃ atthīti nibbidānulomīti attho. Nibbidāpaṭippassaddhiñāṇānīti nibbidāya paṭippassaddhiyaṃ ñāṇāni. Vimuttisukhe ñāṇānīti vimuttisukhena sampayuttāni ñāṇāni.
“哪些是八种……”等问题,因为障碍和助益是彼此对立、互相排斥的一对,所以与它们相关的智就一并说明了。“欲贪”“出离”等的含义,前面已经讲过。而“助益”(upakāraṃ)这个词,是因为词性混淆才用了中性形式。“一切不善法”,指的是前面已说过的之外其余任何不善法。同样,“一切趋向厌离的善法”也是如此。“障碍、助益”这一说法,也是针对同一件事而用了单数。在这里,先问障碍中的智和助益中的智,回答时只说明它们的所缘,这样那些智也就随之得到了解答,最后归结为以这些所缘为对象的智来显示。在随烦恼中的智等处,也是同样的道理。巴利
Katamāni aṭṭhātiādīhi paripanthaupakārānaṃ paṭipakkhavipakkhayugalattā tesu ñāṇāni saheva niddiṭṭhāni. Kāmacchandanekkhammādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāni. Upakāranti ca liṅgavipallāsavasena napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sabbepi akusalā dhammāti vuttāvasesā ye keci akusalā dhammā. Tathā sabbepi nibbedhabhāgiyā kusalā dhammā. ‘‘Paripantho upakāra’’nti ca taṃ tadeva apekkhitvā ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Ettha ca paripanthe ñāṇāni ca upakāre ñāṇāni ca pucchitvā tesaṃ ārammaṇāneva vissajjitvā teheva tāni vissajjitāni hontīti tadārammaṇāni ñāṇāni nigametvā dassesi. Upakkilese ñāṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
十六种智的详细解释的注释巴利
2. Soḷasañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
153 “以十六种行相”:这是指从两个方面所说的十六种智的类别。“心已向上修习、已善向上修习”:在近行地,心已向上修习,已正确地向上修习,意思是已经对上方反复练习,已经正确地反复练习于上方。也有写成“心已向上调伏、已善向上调伏”的读法。“向上调伏”是指为了达到更上的状态而被调伏,或者被能带来更上状态的智所调伏。“善向上调伏”是指正确地为了更上的状态而被调伏,或者被能带来更上状态的智所善巧地调伏。这里的“善”是排除掉不平等状态的意思。在这个读法中,“u”和“du”是两个前缀。还有写成“心已向上调伏、已正确向上调伏”的文本,这里的意思同样是已被调伏。至于“urū aru”,他们说这只是不变词而已。在《琵琶譬喻注》中解释过“tajjitaṃ sutajjitaṃ”的含义,但在这里不适用。“住立于单一性”:在近行地,由于没有种种所缘的散乱,心便安住于单一性。“由于障碍出离的义理故称为盖”:在这里,包括“不愿”在内的一切不善法,都因为障碍的义理而被称为盖。“由于障碍出离的义理”:是指由于阻挡出离者前来的道路的义理。也有写成“由于障碍出离的防护义理”的读法,意思是由于拒绝出离的义理。“出离是圣者的出离”:由于是被称为出离的圣道的因,所以通过果的方便说法,它是圣者的出离。并且,在作为因的道心刹那,圣者们出离、趣向。然而有些人说“出离就是道”。在这里,因为所指的是近行,而且在道心刹那没有光明想和一切善法,所以那种说法不成立。“已被覆盖”:即已被遮蔽。“他不了解”:这是就个人而说的。巴利
153.Soḷasahiākārehīti ubhayapakkhavasena vuttehi soḷasahi ñāṇakoṭṭhāsehi. Uducitaṃ cittaṃ samuducitanti upacārabhūmiyaṃ cittaṃ uddhaṃ ucitaṃ, sammā uddhaṃ ucitaṃ, uparūpari kataparicayaṃ sammā uparūpari kataparicayanti attho. Udujitaṃ cittaṃ samudujitantipi pāṭho. Uparibhāvāya jitaṃ, uparibhāvakarehi vā ñāṇehi jitaṃ udujitaṃ. Samudujitanti samā uparibhāvāya, uparibhāvakarehi vā ñāṇehi jitaṃ. Samāti cettha visamabhāvapaṭikkhepo. Imasmiṃ pāṭhe u, du-iti dve dve upasaggā honti. Urūjitaṃ cittaṃ sammārūjitantipi pāṭho. Etthāpi jitatthoyeva. Urū arūti idaṃ pana nipātamattamevāti vadanti. Vīṇopamaṭṭhakathāya tajjitaṃ sutajjitanti ca attho vutto, so idha na yujjati. Ekatte santiṭṭhatīti upacārabhūmiyaṃ tāva nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvena ekatte patiṭṭhāti. Niyyānāvaraṇaṭṭhena nīvaraṇāti ettha aratipi sabbepi akusalā āvaraṇaṭṭhena nīvaraṇāti vuttā. Niyyānāvaraṇaṭṭhenāti niyyānānaṃ āgamanamaggapidahanaṭṭhena. Niyyānavāraṇaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho, niyyānānaṃ paṭikkhepanaṭṭhenāti attho. Nekkhammaṃ ariyānaṃ niyyānanti maggaṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ niyyānasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa hetuttā phalūpacārena ariyānaṃ niyyānaṃ. Tena ca hetubhūtena maggakkhaṇe ariyā niyyanti nigacchanti. Keci pana ‘‘niyyānanti maggo’’ti vadanti. Idha upacārassa adhippetattā maggakkhaṇe ca ālokasaññāya sabbakusaladhammānañca abhāvā taṃ na yujjati. Nivutattāti paṭicchannattā. Nappajānātīti puggalavasena vuttaṃ.
“心清净者”:这是仅就接近禅定的阶段来说的。“刹那结合”:这些杂染在每一个心刹那中生起,所以它们具有刹那性,称为“刹那性”;刹那性的结合、会合、连结,就叫作“刹那结合”。因此,“刹那结合”的意思是:那些正在生起的杂染,是依照刹那的连结、依照刹那的相续而生起的,并不是仅依单一的心刹那而生起。巴利
Visuddhacittassāti upacārabhūmiyaṃyeva. Khaṇikasamodhānāti cittakkhaṇe cittakkhaṇe uppajjanato khaṇo etesaṃ atthīti khaṇikā, upakkilesā, khaṇikānaṃ samodhāno samāgamo pabandho khaṇikasamodhāno. Tasmā khaṇikasamodhānā, uppajjamānā upakkilesā khaṇikappabandhavasena khaṇikaparamparāvasena uppajjanti, na ekacittakkhaṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
第三 随烦恼智解说的注释巴利
3. Upakkilesañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
154 154. 在第一六分中,吸入的开始、中间与结束:进入体内的风,以鼻尖或口鼻部位为开始,心脏为中间,肚脐为结束。禅修者以正念跟随这吸入的开始、中间与结束,因为所缘位置有种种变化,心就走向内在的散乱;那落入内在散乱的心,无法安住在单一所缘上,所以成为定的障碍。呼出的开始、中间与结束:向外出去的风,以肚脐为开始,心脏为中间,鼻尖、口鼻部位或外界的虚空为结束。这里的连接方式,应当依照前面所说的道理来理解。期盼入息即是贪爱行:观察到“此业处依于鼻风”之后,对粗粗入息的希求所成的欲求,就是贪爱的生起。贪爱生起时,无法安住在单一所缘上,所以成为定的障碍。期盼呼气即是贪着:再次对入息为先的呼气的希求所成的贪着。其余部分应当依照前面所说的道理来连接。被吸入冲击者:是指作了过长或过短吸入的人,由于确实存在依于吸入的身心疲劳,他因此被那吸入所刺穿、所压迫。得呼气时昏醉:因为被入息压迫,对呼气有乐想的人希求呼气,在得到那呼气时生起贪染。依于呼气的(情况)也是同样的道理。巴利
154. Paṭhamacchakke assāsādimajjhapariyosānanti abbhantarapavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ vā mukhanimittaṃ vā ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Taṃ tassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato yogissa ṭhānanānattānugamanena cittaṃ ajjhattaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, taṃ ajjhattavikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ ekatte asaṇṭhahanato samādhissa paripantho. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānanti bahinikkhamanavātassa nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ vā mukhanimittaṃ vā bahiākāso vā pariyosānaṃ. Yojanā panettha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Assāsapaṭikaṅkhanā nikantitaṇhācariyāti ‘‘nāsikāvātāyattamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti sallakkhetvā oḷārikoḷārikassa assāsassa patthanāsaṅkhātā nikāmanā eva taṇhāpavatti. Taṇhāpavattiyā sati ekatte asaṇṭhahanato samādhissa paripantho. Passāsapaṭikaṅkhanā nikantīti puna assāsapubbakassa passāsassa patthanāsaṅkhātā nikanti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Assāsenābhitunnassāti atidīghaṃ atirassaṃ vā assāsaṃ karontassa assāsamūlakassa kāyacittakilamathassa sabbhāvato tena assāsena viddhassa pīḷitassa. Passāsapaṭilābhe mucchanāti assāsena pīḷitattāyeva passāse assādasaññino passāsaṃ patthayato tasmiṃ passāsapaṭilābhe rajjanā. Passāsamūlakepi eseva nayo.
为了说明前面已经讲过的义理,对于已说的偈颂结构,随顺而行的就是“随逐”。所谓“念”,就是成为内散乱和外散乱之因的念。以这个念搅乱心,所以叫“散乱”。那是什么呢?就是吸气。内在的散乱就是“内散乱”,对它的渴望就是“内散乱之渴望”;也就是说,由于不如理作意,而对造成内散乱的吸气生起渴望。按照同样的道理,也应当知道对外散乱的希求。“由这些”是指由这些杂染。“当被散乱时”是指正被搅乱、正被带入散乱时。“心便不解脱”,是说心既不能决意安住于入出息所缘,也不能从敌对法中解脱。“心便不解脱,且成为依他者”,这是连接关系。“不知解脱者”,是说无论自己或他人,都如此地不知依所缘胜解的解脱与依对治的解脱。“依他者”,是指依靠他人、信受他人,他们不取自作证之智;本应说“依他缘者”,却说成“依他者”。然而其义正是如此。巴利
Vuttasseva atthassa anuvaṇṇanatthaṃ vuttesu gāthābandhesu anugacchanāti anugacchamānā. Satīti ajjhattabahiddhāvikkhepahetubhūtā sati. Vikkhipati anena cittanti vikkhepo. Ko so? Assāso. Ajjhattaṃ vikkhepo ajjhattavikkhepo, tassa ākaṅkhanā ajjhattavikkhepākaṅkhanā, asammāmanasikāravasena ajjhattavikkhepakassa assāsassa ākaṅkhanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Eteneva nayena bahiddhāvikkhepapatthanā veditabbā. Yehīti yehi upakkilesehi. Vikkhippamānassāti vikkhipiyamānassa vikkhepaṃ āpādiyamānassa. No ca cittaṃ vimuccatīti cittaṃ assāsapassāsārammaṇe ca nādhimuccati, paccanīkadhammehi ca na vimuccati. Cittaṃ no ca vimuccati parapattiyā ca hontīti sambandho. Vimokkhaṃ appajānantāti so vā añño vā ārammaṇādhimuttivimokkhañca paccanīkavimuttivimokkhañca evaṃ appajānantā. Parapattiyāti parapaccayaṃ parasaddahanaṃ arahanti, na attapaccakkhaṃ ñāṇanti ‘‘parapaccayikā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘parapattiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Attho pana soyeva.
155 155. 在第二组六法里,“相”指的是入息和出息接触的地方。因为入息和出息在长鼻子的人身上是碰着鼻孔而流动的,在短鼻子的人身上则是碰着上唇。如果这位瑜伽行者只作意那个相,那么当他只作意相的时候,心就会在入息上摇动,不能安定下来,这就是这里的意思。他的心既然在那上面不能安定,定就不存在,所以那种摇动就是定的障碍。如果他只作意入息本身,他的心就会因为向内进入而带来散乱,不能安住在相上,因此也在相上摇动。按照这个道理,其余各项也应当这样套用理解。偈颂里说的“被散乱”,就是被弄得散乱、被引向散乱的状态。巴利
155. Dutiyacchakke nimittanti assāsapassāsānaṃ phusanaṭṭhānaṃ. Assāsapassāsā hi dīghanāsikassa nāsāpuṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti, rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Yadi hi ayaṃ yogī taṃ nimittameva āvajjati, tassa nimittameva āvajjamānassa assāse cittaṃ vikampati, na patiṭṭhātīti attho. Tassa tasmiṃ citte appatiṭṭhite samādhissa abhāvato taṃ vikampanaṃ samādhissa paripantho. Yadi assāsameva āvajjati, tassa cittaṃ abbhantarapavesanavasena vikkhepaṃ āvahati, nimitte na patiṭṭhāti, tasmā nimitte vikampati. Iminā nayena sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Gāthāsu vikkhippateti vikkhipīyati vikkhepaṃ āpādīyati.
156 156. 在第三组六法里,“随逐过去的心”是指:心已经越过接触所缘的那个点之后,还跟着入息或出息跑。“落入散乱”是指:被散乱跟着,或者自己跟着散乱、随散乱而去。“期盼未来的心”是指:心期盼、渴望还没到达接触点、还没接触到的入息或出息。“摇动”是指:因为不能安住,被散乱摇动。“退缩”是指:由于精进力太松等而缩下来。“被懈怠随逐”是指:随顺于懒惰的状态。“被掉举所随逐”是指:随顺于散乱。“过度绷紧”是指:由于精进等用力过猛而过度亢奋。“倾向”是指:在可爱的事物上强烈地倾向、依附。“避开”是指:在不可爱的事物上被抵触,或者从那里离开,或者离开而倾向,意思是不从那里离开。“被贪随逐”是指:在这里,作意入出息相的人,在生起的喜乐上,或者在以前笑、说、玩的事物上,贪随逐。“被瞋随逐”是指:在这里,作意时,由于心去到不可爱之处者生起的忧恼,或者在以前惯行的瞋害事上,瞋随逐。在偈颂中“不得定”是指:不得定。“增上心”是指:以心为首而说的增上定。巴利
156. Tatiyacchakke atītānudhāvanaṃ cittanti phusanaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā gataṃ assāsaṃ vā passāsaṃ vā anugacchamānaṃ cittaṃ. Vikkhepānupatitanti vikkhepena anugataṃ, vikkhepaṃ vā sayaṃ anupatitaṃ anugataṃ. Anāgatapaṭikaṅkhanaṃ cittanti phusanaṭṭhānaṃ appattaṃ assāsaṃ vā passāsaṃ vā paṭikaṅkhamānaṃ paccāsīsamānaṃ cittaṃ. Vikampitanti tasmiṃ appatiṭṭhāneneva vikkhepena vikampitaṃ. Līnanti atisithilavīriyatādīhi saṅkucitaṃ. Kosajjānupatitanti kusītabhāvānugataṃ. Atipaggahitanti accāraddhavīriyatādīhi atiussāhitaṃ. Uddhaccānupatitanti vikkhepānugataṃ. Abhinatanti assādavatthūsu bhusaṃ nataṃ allīnaṃ. Apanatanti nirassādavatthūsu patihataṃ, tato apagataṃ vā, apagatanataṃ vā, na tato apagatanti attho. Rāgānupatitanti ettha assāsapassāsanimittaṃ manasikaroto uppannapītisukhe vā pubbe hasitalapitakīḷitavatthūsu vā rāgo anupatati. Byāpādānupatitanti ettha manasikāre nirassādagatacittassa uppannadomanassavasena vā pubbe samudāciṇṇesu āghātavatthūsu vā byāpādo anupatati. Gāthāsu na samādhiyatīti na samāhitaṃ hoti. Adhicittanti cittasīsena niddiṭṭho adhiko samādhi.
157 到这一步,已经依三组六法说明了十八种杂染。现在要显示这些杂染是定的障碍,从而说明它们的过患,所以又说了“再就入息、中间、结尾……”等话。其中,“身和心都变得躁热”是说:由于散乱所生的种种色法,色身也剧烈动荡,变得躁热;由于散乱的持续,心也剧烈动荡,变得躁热。接着,以较轻的程度,说为“被摇动”“被震动”;再轻一些,说为“被颤动”“被抖动”。这就是说,强烈的、中等的、微弱的动荡都一定会发生,不可能没有动荡。由于心之摇摆,即因心之摇摆状态。偈颂中“圆满未修习”是说:像那样圆满,却未修习。“被摇动”即被震动。“被颤动”即轻微地被摇动。因为前文诸盖是紧接的,所以说了“这些盖”(imehi ca pana nīvaraṇehi)这样表示极近的代词。这里在总结时,因为诸盖是有间隔的,所以说了“那些盖”(tehi ca pana nīvaraṇehi)这样表示远指的代词。巴利
157. Ettāvatā tīhi chakkehi aṭṭhārasa upakkilese niddisitvā idāni tesaṃ upakkilesānaṃ samādhissa paripanthabhāvasādhanena ādīnavaṃ dassento puna assāsādimajjhapariyosānantiādimāha. Tattha kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca hontīti vikkhepasamuṭṭhānarūpānaṃ vasena rūpakāyopi, vikkhepasantativasena cittampi mahatā khobhena khubhitā sadarathā ca honti. Tato mandatarena iñjitā kampitā, tato mandatarena phanditā calitā honti. Balavāpi majjhimopi mandopi khobho hotiyeva, na sakkā khobhena na bhavitunti vuttaṃ hoti. Cittaṃ vikampitattāti cittassa vikampitattā. Gāthāsu paripuṇṇā abhāvitāti yathā paripuṇṇā hoti, tathā abhāvitā. Iñjitoti kampito. Phanditoti mandakampito. Heṭṭhā nīvaraṇānaṃ anantarattā ‘‘imehi ca pana nīvaraṇehī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.153) accantasamīpanidassanavacanaṃ kataṃ. Idha pana nigamane nīvaraṇānaṃ santarattā tehi ca pana nīvaraṇehīti parammukhanidassanavacanaṃ kataṃ.
清净智的解释巴利
4. Vodānañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
158 “在清净中的诸智”就是清净的诸智。“清净”:无杂染。“洁白”:光辉。“舍弃那之后”这一句,要和前面所说的“心追随过去、陷入散乱”联系起来理解。“安置于一处”:在吸气和呼气的接触处,把心平等地安置、安立下来。“就在那里决意”:这里说的“一处”,就是在吸气和呼气的接触处,确定下来、作出决定。“策励之后”:为了修习择法觉支和喜觉支而策励。“制伏之后”:为了修习轻安觉支、定觉支和舍觉支而制伏。也有人说:“以念根和精进根策励之后,以念根和定根制伏之后。”“正知而住”:以不净修习等。“再次正知而住”:以慈修习等。以贪所追随,以瞋所追随,他舍断那,这是关联。或者,那心是这样的,正知者以彼对治法舍断贪,舍断瞋,这是意思。“清净”:无随烦恼。“洁白”:光辉。“达一性”:对于证得那那殊胜者,那那一种一性存在。巴利
158.Vodāne ñāṇānīti visuddhañāṇāni. Taṃ vivajjayitvāti yaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ atītānudhāvanaṃ cittaṃ vikkhepānupatitaṃ, taṃ vivajjayitvāti sambandhitabbaṃ. Ekaṭṭhāne samādahatīti assāsapassāsānaṃ phusanaṭṭhāne samaṃ ādahati patiṭṭhāpeti. Tattheva adhimocetīti ekaṭṭhāneti vutte assāsapassāsānaṃ phusanaṭṭhāneyeva sanniṭṭhapeti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti. Paggaṇhitvāti dhammavicayapītisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāya paggahetvā. Viniggaṇhitvāti passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgabhāvanāya viniggaṇhitvā. ‘‘Satindriyavīriyindriyehi paggahetvā, satindriyasamādhindriyehi viniggahetvā’’tipi vadanti. Sampajāno hutvāti asubhabhāvanādīhi. Puna sampajāno hutvāti mettābhāvanādīhi. Yena rāgena anupatitaṃ, yena byāpādena anupatitaṃ, taṃ pajahatīti sambandho. Taṃ cittaṃ īdisanti sampajānanto tappaṭipakkhena rāgaṃ pajahati, byāpādaṃ pajahatīti vā attho. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Pariyodātanti pabhassaraṃ. Ekattagataṃ hotīti taṃ taṃ visesaṃ pattassa taṃ taṃ ekattaṃ gataṃ hoti.
哪些是那个“一性”呢?在这里,虽然一性有适用和不适用的情况,但为了提问,还是把它们合在一起来问。施前分现起之一性:所谓“施前分”,是指舍弃,也就是名为布施物品的布施的前分,即舍弃布施物品的思心所。它的“现起”,是指以作为所缘的方式趋入并安住,这叫作施前分现起;这本身就是一种一性,或者凭借这种一性而具有的一境性,就是施前分现起之一性。也有读作“施舍现起之一性”的,这个读法更优美,意思也一样。这里以分列词句的方式,说明了舍随念的定。虽然是以分列词句的方式说的,但这也成为其余三种一性的亲依止缘,因此说在这里也指出了它。因为毗舍佉大近事女也曾说过:“尊者,在这里,各处雨季安居结束的比丘们会来到舍卫城拜见世尊。他们拜见世尊后,会问:‘尊者,名叫某某的比丘过世了,他的趣向如何?来世如何?’世尊会回答:‘是入流果,或一来果,或不来果,或阿拉汉果。’那时,我会前去请问他们:‘尊者,那位尊贵的比丘以前来过舍卫城吗?’如果他们告诉我:‘那位比丘以前来过舍卫城。’那么,我就会对此得出结论:那位尊贵的比丘一定享用过雨安居衣,或客食,或行路食,或病者食,或看护者食,或病者药,或常粥,这是毫无疑惑的。当我在随念那件事的时候,就会生起喜悦;喜悦的我会生起喜;心怀喜乐的我会身轻安;身轻安的我会感受到乐;处在乐中的我,心会得定。那对我来说,就会是根的修习、力的修习、觉支的修习。”或者,可以这样理解:在这些一性中,第一种是依近行定说的,第二种是依安止定说的,第三种是依观说的,第四种是依道果说的。止的相就是止的相。坏灭相即以坏灭为相。灭就是涅槃。其余各项,在这些所说的三种一性中,也应当依所说的道理来加以联系。巴利
Katame te ekattāti idha yujjamānāyujjamānepi ekatte ekato katvā pucchati. Dānūpasaggupaṭṭhānekattanti dānavatthusaṅkhātassa dānassa upasaggo vosajjanaṃ dānūpasaggo, dānavatthupariccāgacetanā. Tassa upaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena upagantvā ṭhānaṃ dānūpasaggupaṭṭhānaṃ, tadeva ekattaṃ, tena vā ekattaṃ ekaggabhāvo dānūpasaggupaṭṭhānekattaṃ. Dānavosaggupaṭṭhānekattanti pāṭho sundarataro, so evattho. Etena paduddhāravasena cāgānussatisamādhi vutto. Paduddhāravasena vuttopi cesa itaresaṃ tiṇṇampi ekattānaṃ upanissayapaccayo hoti, tasmā idha niddiṭṭhanti vadanti. Visākhāpi hi mahāupāsikā āha – ‘‘idha, bhante, disāsu vassaṃvuṭṭhā bhikkhū sāvatthiṃ āgacchissanti bhagavantaṃ dassanāya, te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti ‘itthannāmo, bhante, bhikkhu kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo’ti? Taṃ bhagavā byākarissati sotāpattiphale vā sakadāgāmiphale vā anāgāmiphale vā arahatte vā. Tyāhaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmi ‘āgatapubbā nu kho, bhante, tena ayyena sāvatthī’ti? Sace me vakkhanti ‘āgatapubbā tena bhikkhunā sāvatthī’ti. Niṭṭhamettha gacchissāmi nissaṃsayaṃ paribhuttaṃ tena ayyena vassikasāṭikā vā āgantukabhattaṃ vā gamikabhattaṃ vā gilānabhattaṃ vā gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vā gilānabhesajjaṃ vā dhuvayāgu vāti. Tassā me tadanussarantiyā pāmojjaṃ jāyissati, pamuditāya pīti jāyissati, pītimanāya kāyo passambhissati, passaddhakāyā sukhaṃ vedayissāmi, sukhiniyā cittaṃ samādhiyissati, sā me bhavissati indriyabhāvanā balabhāvanā bojjhaṅgabhāvanā’’ti (mahāva. 351). Atha vā ekattesu paṭhamaṃ upacārasamādhivasena vuttaṃ, dutiyaṃ appanāsamādhivasena, tatiyaṃ vipassanāvasena, catutthaṃ maggaphalavasenāti veditabbaṃ. Samathassa nimittaṃ samathanimittaṃ. Vayo bhaṅgo eva lakkhaṇaṃ vayalakkhaṇaṃ. Nirodho nibbānaṃ. Sesametesu tīsu vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
倾心于布施的人,就是乐于布施的人。增上心,是作为观基础的定。观见者,是从坏灭随观开始,以三种随观观照诸行的修行人。圣者,指八种人。第二等三种一性,依入出息念和其余业处而适用。以四处,就是以四种原因。依定、观、道、果而说的“达到一性的心,已进入道清净、被舍所长养、被智所喜悦”等,是标举词。“初禅以什么为始”等,是为了详释那些标举词,以提问为先导的解释词。其中,已进入道清净:道本身就是清净,因为它清净了盖的垢染,进入那道清净就是进入。被舍所长养:被中舍所长养、增长。被智所喜悦:被能令清净的智所喜悦、净白、清净。关于这些,有人这样解释:道清净是具足资具的近行定,长养舍是安止定,喜悦是省察。然而,因为经中说“达到一性的心,已进入道清净等”,所以应当这样理解:在安止定之中,由进入的方式成为道清净,由中舍的作用成为长养舍,由实现诸法不逾越之性等、能令清净的智的作用成就,成为喜悦。为什么呢?在安止生起的那个刹那,那个称为盖的烦恼群是彼禅的障碍,由此心清净,以清净故,离诸障碍而趣入中性止相。所谓中性止相,就是均等转起的安止定。其后,前心以同一相续转变的方式趣向彼性,名为趣入中性止相。如是趣入已,以达彼性故,名为入于其中。如是,先于前心中以现前之相所成,于初禅生起之刹那,依来入的方式,当知道清净。又,对此已清净之心,更无可清净故,于清净不加功用,是名为舍观清净心。以入止性故,于已入止者更不于等持加功用,是名为舍观止入者。正由入止性故,其心舍离烦恼杂染,以一性而住,更不于住一性加功用,是名为舍观一性住。如是,当知以中舍的作用,而为舍所长养。巴利
Cāgādhimuttānanti dāne adhimuttānaṃ. Adhicittanti vipassanāpādakasamādhi. Vipassakānanti bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya tīhi anupassanāhi saṅkhāre vipassantānaṃ. Ariyapuggalānanti aṭṭhannaṃ. Dutiyādīni tīṇi ekattāni ānāpānassativasena sesakammaṭṭhānavasena ca yujjanti. Catūhi ṭhānehīti catūhi kāraṇehi. Samādhivipassanāmaggaphalānaṃ vasena ‘‘ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita’’nti uddesapadāni. ‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa ko ādī’’tiādīni tesaṃ uddesapadānaṃ vitthāretukamyatāpucchāpubbaṅgamāni niddesapadāni. Tattha paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandanti paṭipadā eva nīvaraṇamalavisodhanato visuddhi, taṃ paṭipadāvisuddhiṃ pakkhandaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ. Upekkhānubrūhitanti tatramajjhattupekkhāya brūhitaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsitanti pariyodāpakena ñāṇena sampahaṃsitaṃ pariyodāpitaṃ visodhitaṃ. Paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro, upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā, sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇāti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Yasmā pana ‘‘ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā antoappanāyameva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Yasmiñhi vāre appanā uppajjati, tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva. Tadanantaraṃ pana purimacittaṃ ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattaṃ upagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma. Evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimacitte vijjamānākāranipphādikā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi veditabbā. Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa puna visodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvūpagamanena samathapaṭipannassa puna samādāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathapaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.
那些在这样被舍随增的心中所生起的、被称为定与慧的双运法,彼此不超越而运转;还有信等诸根,因为从种种烦恼中解脱,以解脱味成为一味而运转;以及为了随顺那些不超越、一味之法的精进;还有在那一刹那生起的反复修习——所有这些行相,都是因为智在杂染与清净中看到了种种过患与功德之后,以各种方式使心喜悦、清净、净化的缘故而成就的。因此,应当理解为:以令诸法不超越等状态得以实现,从而使心清净的智,其作用完成,就是喜悦。在这里,因为依于舍,智变得明显,正如《无碍解道》所说:这样被策励的心,好好地旁观;依舍、依慧,慧根变得殊胜。依舍,心从种种烦恼中解脱;依解脱、依慧,慧根变得殊胜。由于解脱,那些法成为一味;一味的含义就是修习。因此,作为智之作用的喜悦,被称为最终。巴利
Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tattha jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yaṃ cesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannā, tasmā dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbāti vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, yathāha – ‘‘tathāpaggahitaṃ cittaṃ sādhukaṃ ajjhupekkhati, upekkhāvasena paññāvasena paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Upekkhāvasena nānattakilesehi cittaṃ vimuccati, vimokkhavasena paññāvasena paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Vimuttattā te dhammā ekarasā honti, ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.201). Tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā pariyosānanti vuttā.
“这样,已进入三种状态”等等,是对这个心的赞叹之语。其中,“这样,已进入三种状态”的意思是:依照上面所说的方式,也就是从道清净、舍的修习、智的欢喜这三方面来说,已经达到了三种状态。“具足寻”是说,因为远离了烦恼的扰动,心通过寻而达到了美好的状态。“心具足决意”是说,心在同一所缘上,以不间断地运转这种决意而具足、不欠缺。就像在“决意自在”中,“决意”指的是禅那的运转,同样地,这里“心的决意”也可以理解为心一境性,因为心正是在同一个所缘上决定下来,不在这里散乱。不过,由于后面又单独说了“具足定”,所以“心具足决意”还是应该按照前面说的方式来理解。或者,因为定本身就包含在禅那之中,所以“心具足决意”是依寻、伺、喜、乐、一境性这五个禅支来说的;而“具足定”则包含在诸根之中,是依信、精进、念、定、慧这五根来说的。在第二禅等当中,那些得不到的词句就舍弃不用,只按照能得到的情况来说“具足喜”等等。巴利
Evaṃ tivattagatantiādīni tasseva cittassa thomanavacanāni. Tattha evaṃ tivattagatanti evaṃ yathāvuttena vidhinā paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandanaupekkhānubrūhanāñāṇasampahaṃsanāvasena tividhabhāvaṃ gataṃ. Vitakkasampannanti kilesakkhobhavirahitattā vitakkena sundarabhāvaṃ pannaṃ gataṃ. Cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannanti tasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittassa nirantarappavattisaṅkhātena adhiṭṭhānena sampannaṃ anūnaṃ. Yathā adhiṭṭhānavasiyaṃ adhiṭṭhānanti jhānappavatti, tathā idhāpi cittassa adhiṭṭhānanti cittekaggatāpi yujjati. Tena hi ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, na ettha vikkhipatīti. ‘‘Samādhisampanna’’nti visuṃ vuttattā pana vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Atha vā samādhisseva jhānasaṅgahitattā cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannanti jhānaṅgapañcakavasena vuttaṃ. Samādhisampannanti indriyasaṅgahitattā indriyapañcakavasena, dutiyajjhānādīsu pana alabbhamānāni padāni pahāya labbhamānakavasena pītisampannantiādi vuttaṃ.
在无常随观等十八种大观里,寻等禅支是完整具备的,因为它们属于欲界。而在这些观里没有安止定,所以道清净等应当按刹那定来配合说明。在四种道中,按初禅的方式来说,因为能获得寻等禅支,所以就依可获得的情况说寻等禅支完整具备。因为在第二禅性的道等之中,寻等禅支就像在第二禅等里一样已经舍离了。到这里为止,十三种清净智已经详细说明了。是怎样的呢?依靠安住于一处、就在那里胜解、舍断懈怠、舍断掉举、舍断贪欲、舍断瞋恚而相应的是六种智;依靠四种一性而相应的是四种智;依靠道清净、长养舍、令喜悦而相应的是三种智——这样总共说明了十三种智。巴利
Aniccānupassanādīsu aṭṭhārasasu mahāvipassanāsu vitakkādayo paripuṇṇāyeva tāsaṃ kāmāvacarattā. Etāsu ca appanāya abhāvato paṭipadāvisuddhiādayo khaṇikasamādhivasena yojetabbā. Catūsu maggesu paṭhamajjhānikavasena vitakkādīnaṃ labbhanato labbhamānakavaseneva vitakkādayo paripuṇṇā vuttā. Dutiyajjhānikādīsu hi maggesu vitakkādayo jhānesu viya parihāyantīti. Ettāvatā terasa vodānañāṇāni vitthārato niddiṭṭhāni honti. Kathaṃ? Ekaṭṭhāne samādahanena tattheva adhimuccanena kosajjappajahanena uddhaccappajahanena rāgappajahanena byāpādappajahanena sampayuttāni cha ñāṇāni, catūhi ekattehi sampayuttāni cattāri ñāṇāni, paṭipadāvisuddhiupekkhānubrūhanāsampahaṃsanāhi sampayuttāni tīṇi ñāṇānīti evaṃ terasa ñāṇāni niddiṭṭhāni.
159 159. 即使如此,为了说明这些智是依靠入出息念定的修习而成就的,他先不引入那些智,而是以“相就是入息出息”等方式,开示了以劝勉为先导的入出息念定修习方法,最后才引入那些智来显示。其中,“相”已经说过。“无一所缘”就是没有单一心的所缘。这里的“ma”是连接音节。也可以读作“无一所缘”,意思就是不能成为单一心的所缘。“三法”就是相、入息、出息这三种法。“修习”就是入出息念定的修习。“如何”这一问,是为了解释前面劝勉偈之后紧接着所说的解答偈的含义而提出的问题。“非这些”就是不是这些。也有“非且这些”的读法,只是断句不同。“如何而非未了知,如何而心不散乱”,这里的“如何”要与后面五个词连起来理解。“精进显现”就是发起入出息念定修习的精进显现出来。因为人们靠它来努力,所以称为“精进”。“修行成就”就是修行者成就了能镇伏诸盖的禅那。因为禅那是用来镇伏诸盖的,所以称为“修行”。“证得殊胜”就是获得能断除结缚的道。道是止与观的利益,所以称为“殊胜”。又因为它是殊胜中最首要的,所以没有用“又”字来连接。巴利
159. Evaṃ santepi ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanāvasena tesaṃ nipphattiṃ dassetukāmo tāni ñāṇāni anigametvāva nimittaṃ assāsapassāsātiādinā nayena codanāpubbaṅgamaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanāvidhiṃ dassetvā ante tāni ñāṇāni nigametvā dassesi. Tattha nimittaṃ vuttameva. Anārammaṇāmekacittassāti anārammaṇā ekacittassa. Ma-kāro panettha padasandhikaro. Anārammaṇamekacittassātipi pāṭho, ekassa cittassa ārammaṇaṃ na bhavantīti attho. Tayo dhammeti nimittādayo tayo dhamme. Bhāvanāti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā. Kathanti paṭhamaṃ vuttāya codanāgāthāya anantaraṃ vuttāya parihāragāthāya atthaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Na cimeti na ca ime. Na cametipi pāṭho, soyeva padacchedo. Kathaṃ na ca aviditā honti, kathaṃ na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchatīti evaṃ kathaṃ saddo sesehi pañcahi yojetabbo. Padhānañca paññāyatīti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanārambhakaṃ vīriyaṃ sandissati. Vīriyañhi padahanti tenāti padhānanti vuccati. Payogañca sādhetīti nīvaraṇavikkhambhakaṃ jhānañca yogī nipphādeti. Jhānañhi nīvaraṇavikkhambhanāya payuñjīyatīti payogoti vuttaṃ. Visesamadhigacchatīti saṃyojanappahānakaraṃ maggañca paṭilabhati. Maggo hi samathavipassanānaṃ ānisaṃsattā visesoti vutto. Visesassa ca pamukhabhūtattā ca-kārena samuccayo na kato.
现在,为了用譬喻来说明所问的义理,他说了“犹如树”等话。它的意思是:就像有人为了用斧头把树劈开,先用斧头砍削好,然后在劈的时候,为了让它保持不动,把它放在平坦的地面上,使它适合操作。“用斧头”是指用手斧。“来了”是指斧刃碰到树后,朝自己这边过来。“去了”是指斧刃碰到树后,朝对面那边过去。“或”这个字是表示并列。“并非不被了知”是说:在树上,被斧刃碰到的地方,观察的人虽然没有到达那个位置,但因为那些斧刃的来去,一切斧刃都是被了知的。“精进”是指砍树所需的精勤。“修行”是指砍树的动作。“证得殊胜”这句话在譬喻中没有。“所系念的相”是指作为系念的相的、作为原因的鼻端或口相。以它系念于心于所缘,这称为系念,即念。或者鼻端是指长鼻者的鼻端。或者口相是指短鼻者的上唇。因为上唇在口中是念的相,所以称为口相。“来了”是指从所触之处向内而来。“去了”是指从所触之处向外而去。“并非不被了知”是说:因为没有到达所触之处,入出息没有来去,所以那些一切也都是被了知的。“堪任”是说:以那样的精勤,身和心都堪任,适合修习,适于修习。这精勤称为精进,这是以果说因。“杂染被舍断”是指以镇伏的方式舍断诸盖。“寻被止息”是指种种所缘行境的不稳定的寻得以止息。以那使杂染被舍断、寻被止息的禅那,这是修行。这是依修行而作阳性说明。“结被舍断”是指那些被各自道所断的结以正断舍断的方式被舍断。“随眠被灭尽”是指因为已舍断的不会再生起之法性,或者它们的生起边和灭尽边已消失,所以是“边尽”,先前未边尽的现在边尽,所以是“边尽”,是坏灭的意思。为了显示结的舍断由随眠的舍断而成,不是别的,所以说了随眠的舍断。以那使结被舍断、随眠被灭尽的道,这是殊胜,这是意思。在第四四法中,因为圣道也被指出,所以这里说了圣道。因为一心的所缘二者不存在的未被说也成立,所以不放弃那一点,就这样作了总结:这三种法不是一心的所缘。巴利
Idāni taṃ pucchitamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento seyyathāpi rukkhotiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā nāma kakacena phālanatthaṃ vāsiyā tacchitvā rukkho phālanakāle niccalabhāvatthaṃ same bhūmipadese payogakkhamaṃ katvā ṭhapito. Kakacenāti hatthakakacena. Āgateti rukkhaṃ phusitvā attano samīpabhāgaṃ āgate. Gateti rukkhaṃ phusitvā parabhāgaṃ gate. Vā-saddo samuccayattho. Na aviditā hontīti rukkhe kakacadantehi phuṭṭhaṃ purisena pekkhamānaṃ ṭhānaṃ appatvā tesaṃ āgamanagamanābhāvato sabbepi kakacadantā viditāva honti. Padhānanti rukkhacchedanavīriyaṃ. Payoganti rukkhacchedanakiriyaṃ. ‘‘Visesamadhigacchatī’’ti vacanaṃ upamāya natthi. Upanibandhanā nimittanti upanibandhanāya satiyā nimittabhūtaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ nāsikaggaṃ vā mukhanimittaṃ vā. Upanibandhati etāya ārammaṇe cittanti upanibandhanā nāma sati. Nāsikagge vāti dīghanāsiko nāsikagge. Mukhanimitte vāti rassanāsiko uttaroṭṭhe. Uttaroṭṭho hi mukhe satiyā nimittanti mukhanimittanti vutto. Āgateti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānato abbhantaraṃ āgate. Gateti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānato bahiddhā gate. Na aviditā hontīti phusanaṭṭhānaṃ appatvā assāsapassāsānaṃ āgamanagamanābhāvato sabbepi te viditā eva honti. Kammaniyaṃ hotīti yena vīriyena kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ bhāvanākammakkhamaṃ bhāvanākammayoggaṃ hoti. Idaṃ vīriyaṃ padhānaṃ nāmāti phalena kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Upakkilesā pahīyantīti vikkhambhanavasena nīvaraṇāni pahīyanti. Vitakkā vūpasammantīti nānārammaṇacārino anavaṭṭhitā vitakkā upasamaṃ gacchanti. Yena jhānena upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasammanti. Ayaṃ payogoti payogamapekkhitvā pulliṅganiddeso kato. Saññojanā pahīyantīti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhā saññojanā samucchedappahānena pahīyanti. Anusayā byantīhontīti pahīnānaṃ puna anuppattidhammakattā vigato uppādanto vā vayanto vā etesanti byantā, pubbe abyantā byantā hontīti byantīhonti, vinassantīti attho. Saññojanappahānaṃ anusayappahānena hoti, na aññathāti dassanatthaṃ anusayappahānamāha. Yena maggena saññojanā pahīyanti anusayā byantīhonti, ayaṃ visesoti attho. Catutthacatukke ariyamaggassāpi niddiṭṭhattā idha ariyamaggo vutto. Ekacittassa ārammaṇadvayābhāvassa avuttepi siddhattā taṃ avissajjetvāva evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na hontīti nigamanaṃ kataṃ.
160 现在,为了赞叹那位通过修习而成就的瑜伽行者,先说了“入出息念于谁……”这首偈颂,然后解释它的含义。其中,如果有人具足入出息念——就像佛陀所教导的那样圆满、善加修习、依次熟练——那么他就照亮这个世间。像什么呢?就像月亮从云等遮蔽中解脱出来,照亮虚空世间;同样,那位瑜伽行者照亮这个五蕴等构成的世间。这就是与偈颂的关联。在解释“犹如月亮从云中解脱”这句话时,因为也提到了雾等,所以应当知道这里省略了“等”字。在偈颂的解释中,“没有呼出,没有吸入”是用否定的方式特别指出同一个意思。“念的现起”,意思是以不忘失,趋入吸入之后安住,这就叫作念。呼出也是这样。到这里,在入息和出息上的念,就叫作入出息念,这个意思已经说完了。巴利
160. Idāni taṃ bhāvanāsiddhisādhakaṃ yogāvacaraṃ thunanto ānāpānassati yassāti gāthaṃ vatvā tassā niddesamāha. Tattha ānāpānassatiyo yathā buddhena desitā, tathā paripuṇṇā subhāvitā anupubbaṃ paricitā yassa atthi saṃvijjanti. So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti. Kiṃ viya? Abbhā muttova candimā yathā abbhādīhi mutto candimā imaṃ okāsalokaṃ pabhāseti, tathā so yogāvacaro imaṃ khandhādilokaṃ pabhāsetīti gāthāya sambandho. ‘‘Abbhā muttova candimā’’ti ca padassa niddese mahikādīnampi vuttattā ettha ādisaddalopo katoti veditabbo. Gāthāniddese no passāso no assāsoti so soyeva attho paṭisedhena visesetvā vutto. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti asammussanatāya tameva assāsaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ sati nāmāti attho. Tathā passāsaṃ. Ettāvatā ānāpānesu sati ānāpānassatīti attho vutto hoti.
现在,为了指出仅凭念本身所说的“当它……”那个人,而说:当某人吸气时,他的念现前;当某人呼气时,他的念现前。意思是:当某人吸气时,他的念趋入吸气并安住;当某人呼气时,他的念趋入呼气并安住。圆满:是通过禅那、观与道的次第相续,证得阿罗汉道而圆满。正是针对那些禅那、观、道的法,才说了“以摄持之义”等语。因为那些法被这位瑜伽行者所摄持,所以是所摄持,并以那摄持之义而圆满。其中,对于所有的心与心所法,因为它们互相伴随,所以以伴随之义而圆满。由于修习的完成,以充满之义而圆满。四种修习等语,是依照“善修习”这个词的含义而说的。四种修习如前所述。已令为乘:令它们变得像套好轭的车乘一样。已作基础:以安住之义,令它们变得像基础一样。已随行:已现前。熟习:周遍积集、积聚。善着手:善巧着手、善作。于任何处所希望:于任何禅那、任何观中,如果他希望。于彼彼处:于那些禅那、那些观中。得自在者:获得自在、多能的状态。得力者:获得止观之力。得无畏者:获得无畏、熟练的状态。彼等法:即止与观之法。与作意相连:系属于作意,即只要作意,那些法就与他的相续或智相应。与意愿相连:系属于意愿,即只要意愿,就按上述方式相应。这里,作意是指心的生起;而意愿是为了显示其同义词、说明其含义而说的。因此说已令为乘,即因为如此作为,那些法便成为像套好轭的车乘一样。巴利
Idāni sativaseneva ‘‘yassā’’ti vuttaṃ puggalaṃ niddisitukāmo yo assasati, tassupaṭṭhāti. Yo passasati, tassupaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ. Yo assasati, tassa sati assāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhati. Yo passasati, tassa sati passāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti attho. Paripuṇṇāti jhānavipassanāmaggaparamparāya arahattamaggappattiyā paripuṇṇā. Teyeva hi jhānavipassanāmaggadhamme sandhāya pariggahaṭṭhenātiādimāha. Te hi dhammā iminā yoginā pariggayhamānattā pariggahā, tena pariggahaṭṭhena paripuṇṇā. Tattha sabbesaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ aññamaññaparivārattā parivāraṭṭhena paripuṇṇā. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṭṭhena paripuṇṇā. Catasso bhāvanātiādīni subhāvitāti vuttapadassa atthavasena vuttāni. Catasso bhāvanā heṭṭhā vuttāyeva. Yānīkatāti yuttayānasadisā katā. Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena vatthusadisā katā. Anuṭṭhitāti paccupaṭṭhitā. Paricitāti samantato citā upacitā. Susamāraddhāti suṭṭhu samāraddhā sukatā. Yattha yattha ākaṅkhatīti yesu yesu jhānesu yāsu yāsu vipassanāsu sace icchati. Tattha tatthāti tesu tesu jhānesu tāsu tāsu vipassanāsu. Vasippattoti vasībhāvaṃ bahubhāvaṃ patto. Balappattoti samathavipassanābalappatto. Vesārajjappattoti visāradabhāvaṃ paṭubhāvaṃ patto. Te dhammāti samathavipassanā dhammā. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhāti āvajjanāyattā, āvajjitamatteyeva tassa santānena, ñāṇena vā sampayogaṃ gacchantīti attho. Ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhāti ruciāyattā, rocitamatteyeva vuttanayena sampayogaṃ gacchantīti attho. Manasikāro panettha āvajjanāya cittuppādo. Ākaṅkhanāya vevacanavasena atthavivaraṇatthaṃ vutto. Tena vuccati yānīkatāti evaṃ katattāyeva te yuttayānasadisā katā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti.
在十六种基础中的每一种上。“善决意”就是善加安立。“善现起”就是很好地现起。因为与心相应的念和心各自执行自己的作用,所以用顺向和逆向的方式把它们连接起来,显示出这两法。因此说“已作基础”,意思是:正因为如此,它们就成了已作安立的。“以任何处引导心”,是指从先前的活动状态移开,然后把心导向任何修习上的殊胜境界。“念随彼彼处而转”,是指在那种种修习的殊胜境界上,念变得随顺,从先前的活动状态退回而转起。这里的“以任何、彼”,就像“世尊在何处便前往何处”这类句子一样,应理解为处格的意义。因此说“已随行”,意思是:正因为这样去做,它们才跟随着种种修习之后而安住。应当知道,由于入出息念以念为精要,所以在“已作基础”和“已随行”这两个用语中,都是连同念一起来说的。巴利
Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ vatthusminti soḷasasu vatthūsu ekekasmiṃ. Svādhiṭṭhitanti suppatiṭṭhitaṃ. Sūpaṭṭhitāti suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā. Sampayuttacittasatīnaṃ saheva sakasakakiccakaraṇato anulomapaṭilomavasena yojetvā te dve dhammā dassitā. Tena vuccati vatthukatāti evaṃ bhūtattāyeva katapatiṭṭhā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yena yena cittaṃ abhinīharatīti pubbappavattito apanetvā yattha yattha bhāvanāvisese cittaṃ upaneti. Tena tena sati anuparivattatīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃyeva bhāvanāvisese sati anukūlā hutvā pubbappavattito nivattitvā pavattati. ‘‘Yena, tenā’’ti cettha ‘‘yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. 5.1; su. ni. maṅgalasutta) viya bhummattho veditabbo. Tena vuccati anuṭṭhitāti evaṃ karaṇatoyeva taṃ taṃ bhāvanaṃ anugantvā ṭhitā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ānāpānassatiyā satipadhānattā vatthukatānuṭṭhitapadesu satiyā saha yojanā katāti veditabbā.
不过,只有已经圆满的才算真正被熟习——已经增长、已经得到反复练习。所以,“圆满”这个词里说的三种含义,在“熟习”这个词里也说了,而且还多说了第四种特别的含义。其中,“以念摄持”是指:瑜伽行者用与心相应的念,或者用修行之前阶段的念,在应当被摄持的对象上加以把握。“战胜恶不善法”是指:以彻底断除的方式,战胜、压伏那些低劣的烦恼。这也是以人为依托来说法的。因为当那些法被战胜时,具有那些法的人也就被称为战胜了。那些法在不失念的自身生起的那一刹那,已经开始着手战胜,所以被称为“已战胜”,就像把“已经开始吃了”说成“已经吃了”一样。不过,这里的语法特征要依据声明论来理解。既然如此,本来应该说成“parijitā”(已战胜),却把ja变成了ca,说成“paricitā”(熟习)。就像在词义解释中,把“sammā gado”解释为“sugato”时,依据词源学的规则把da变成了ta,这里也应该同样理解。在这个词义解释的语境中,“熟习”这个词是作主格的词,而前面三个是作宾格的词。巴利
Yasmā pana paripuṇṇāyeva paricitā honti vaḍḍhitā laddhāsevanā, tasmā ‘‘paripuṇṇā’’tipade vuttā tayo atthā ‘‘paricitā’’tipadepi vuttā, catuttho visesatthopi vutto. Tattha satiyā pariggaṇhantoti sampayuttāya, pubbabhāgāya vā satiyā pariggahetabbe pariggaṇhanto yogī. Jināti pāpake akusale dhammeti samucchedavasena lāmake kilese jināti abhibhavati. Ayañca puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. Dhammesu hi jinantesu taṃdhammasamaṅgīpuggalopi jināti nāma. Te ca dhammā satiṃ avihāya attano pavattikkhaṇe jinitumāraddhā jitāti vuccanti yathā ‘‘bhuñjitumāraddho bhutto’’ti vuccati. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘parijitā’’ti vattabbe ja-kārassa ca-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘paricitā’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā sammā gado assāti sugatoti atthavikappe da-kārassa ta-kāro niruttilakkhaṇena kato, evamidhāpi veditabbo. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe paricitāti padaṃ kattusādhanaṃ, purimāni tīṇi kammasādhanāni.
“四善精勤”这句话,说的是“四种善精勤之义”,这里要看出省略了“义”这个字。应当知道,在这个语境里,“善精勤”这个词的意思就是被称为“善精勤”的,或者是指善精勤的法。应当知道,这是依照四种含义的区分而说为“四”,并不是依照法的区分。然而,因为只有善修习的才是善精勤,别的不是,所以三种修习的含义在这里也被说到了。而“修习”的含义在讲那三种含义时其实已经讲过了,因此不再重复说它,转而说了断除其对立面的含义。因为通过彻底断除对立面,才能看出精勤的圆满,由此就说了善精勤达到顶点的含义。其中,“其对立面”是指那些禅那、观和道的对立面。“烦恼”是指欲贪等,以及与常想等相应的身见等。“由于完全被断除”是指以镇伏、彼分断和断断的方式被彻底断除、被摧毁。不过,有些本子里写成“完全被拔出”,那样写不好。巴利
Cattāro susamāraddhāti cattāro susamāraddhatthāti vuttaṃ hoti, atthasaddassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Susamāraddhāti padassa atthāpi hi idha susamāraddhāti vuttāti veditabbā, susamāraddhadhammā vā. Caturatthabhedato cattāroti vuttāti veditabbā, na dhammabhedato. Yasmā pana subhāvitāyeva susamāraddhā honti, na aññe, tasmā tayo bhāvanatthā idhāpi vuttā. Āsevanatthopi tīsu vuttesu vuttoyeva hoti, tasmā taṃ avatvā tappaccanīkānaṃ susamūhatattho vutto. Paccanīkasamugghātena hi āraddhapariyosānaṃ paññāyati, tena susamāraddhassa sikhāppatto attho vutto hoti. Tattha tappaccanīkānanti tesaṃ jhānavipassanāmaggānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtānaṃ. Kilesānanti kāmacchandādīnaṃ niccasaññādisampayuttānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnañca. Susamūhatattāti vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedavasena suṭṭhu samūhatattā nāsitattā. Potthakesu pana ‘‘susamugghātattā’’ti likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ.
161 161. 接着,为了显示同一个词句的另一种义理分别,说出了“善……”等语。其中,“于彼彼处而生”:是在那达到顶极的修习殊胜处而生起。“无过失”:因为不成为烦恼的所缘,所以远离了烦恼的过失。“善”:从生起的性质来说是善。“菩提分法”:因为属于以觉悟之义而得到“菩提”之名的圣者之方,所以是菩提分法。所谓“属于此方”,就是安住在能资助的状态。这些就是三十七法:四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道。“此是寂静”:这在道刹那生起的法,以断尽的方式使烦恼寂静、消灭,所以名为寂静。“灭涅槃”:因为苦的灭尽所以是灭,因为称为渴爱的贪爱不存在所以是涅槃。“此是善寂静”:这涅槃因为远离一切有为的不寂静,所以善寂静,名为善寂静。“已知”:称为菩提分法的寂静,以无痴之智而了知;称为涅槃的善寂静,以所缘之智而了知。那两者就以那智如同以眼而见。“已识”:那两者通过在相续中生起及作为所缘而被获得。如已知一样,以慧现证并触证。“不萎缩、不散乱、不躁动、一心”:这是对前前词句的义理阐明。其中,“已发起”:已安立。“不萎缩”:不退缩。“现起”:前往而住立。“不散乱”:不损坏。“寂静”:已止息。“不躁动”:无掉举。“等持”:平等安立。“一心”:不散乱。巴利
161. Puna tasseva padassa aññampi atthavikappaṃ dassento susamantiādimāha. Tattha tattha jātāti tasmiṃ sikhāppattabhāvanāvisese jātā. Anavajjāti kilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvānupagamanena kilesadosavirahitā. Kusalāti jātivasena kusalā. Bodhipakkhiyāti bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti laddhanāmassa ariyassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā. Pakkhe bhavattāti hi upakārabhāve ṭhitattā. Te ca ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.35; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22; mi. pa. 5.4.1) sattatiṃsa dhammā. Idaṃ samanti idaṃ maggakkhaṇe dhammajātaṃ samucchedavasena kilese sameti vināsetīti samaṃ nāma. Nirodhonibbānanti dukkhanirodhattā nirodho, vānasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya abhāvā nibbānaṃ. Idaṃ susamanti idaṃ nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatavisamāpagatattā suṭṭhu samanti susamaṃ nāma. Ñātanti bodhipakkhiyasaṅkhātaṃ samaṃ asammohato ñāṇena ñātaṃ, nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ susamaṃ ārammaṇato ñāṇena ñātaṃ. Tadeva dvayaṃ teneva cakkhunā viya diṭṭhaṃ. Viditanti tadeva dvayaṃ santāne uppādanena ārammaṇakaraṇena ca paṭiladdhaṃ. Ñātaṃ viya paññāya sacchikataṃ phassitañca. ‘‘Asallīnaṃ asammuṭṭhā asāraddho ekagga’’nti purimassa purimassa padassa atthappakāsanaṃ. Tattha āraddhanti paṭṭhapitaṃ. Asallīnanti asaṅkucitaṃ. Upaṭṭhitāti upagantvā ṭhitā. Asammuṭṭhāti avinaṭṭhā. Passaddhoti nibbuto. Asāraddhoti niddaratho. Samāhitanti samaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Ekagganti avikkhittaṃ.
“四种已善精勤”等,是整句“已善精勤”的根本含义。而“有等……”等,是“善等”一词的分别含义;“已知……”等,是“已精勤”一词的分别含义。这里词义的对应是这样的:本来应该说“等与善等与等善等”,但像“名色”那样,取一部分相同的形式来省略,就只说成“善等”。至于“这是等,这是善等”,则是抛开其他参照,用中性词来表达。又因为“已知”也可以说成“见”,而“见”和“已精勤”在意义上是一回事;“已了知”“已证知”“已触达”又都是“已知”的同义词,所以说“已知”时,就已经表达了“已精勤”的意思。巴利
‘‘Cattāro susamāraddhā’’tiādi sakalassa susamāraddhavacanassa mūlattho. ‘‘Atthi sama’’ntiādi pana susamavacanassa, ‘‘ñāta’’ntiādi āraddhavacanassa vikappatthā. Tatthāyaṃ padatthasaṃsandanā – ‘‘samā ca susamā ca samasusamā’’ti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesaṃ katvā ‘‘susamā’’ icceva vuttā yathā nāmañca rūpañca nāmarūpañca nāmarūpanti. ‘‘Idaṃ samaṃ, idaṃ susama’’nti pana anaññāpekkhaṃ katvā napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Yasmā pana ñātampi diṭṭhanti vuccati, diṭṭhañca āraddhañca atthato ekaṃ. Viditasacchikataphassitāni pana ñātavevacanāni, tasmā ñātanti āraddhatthoyeva vutto hoti.
已开始的精进不松懈,这只是对“已开始”这个词的直接解释。而“现起的念”等等,是为了说明与精进相应的辅助法才说的,不是为了说明“已开始”这个词的含义。按前一种含义,是“很好地开始”;按这里的含义,是“善”和“开始”。省略合并之后,就说成“已善精勤”。把握了这个含义,才说“因此称为已善精勤”。巴利
Āraddhaṃ hoti vīriyaṃ asallīnanti ayaṃ pana āraddhavacanassa ujukatthoyeva. Upaṭṭhitā satītiādīni pana sampayuttavīriyassa upakārakadhammadassanatthaṃ vuttāni, na āraddhavacanassa atthadassanatthaṃ. Purimena atthena suṭṭhu samāraddhāti susamāraddhā ca, iminā atthena susamā āraddhāti susamāraddhā ca ekasese kate ‘‘susamāraddhā’’ti vuccanti. Imamatthaṃ pariggahetvā ‘‘tena vuccati susamāraddhā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“次第”的意思是按照顺序,前前跟着后后。这里说的是“前前随”。所谓“以长入息”,就是依据所说的“长”来谈入息。“前前”就是前前的念。这样已经说明了“前”这个词的含义。“后后”同样是指念。这样已经说明了“随”这个词的含义。通过这两方面,就说明了以“前”和“随”两者来反复修习的意思。上面已经详细展开了十六事,这里则加以省略,只显示了最后一项“随观舍遣”。因为到达修习顶峰的入出息念,能够随自己的意愿反复生起,所以它们既是相互反复修习,也是随顺反复修习。因此说:“它们既是相互反复修习,也是随顺反复修习。”巴利
Anupubbanti yathānukkamenāti attho, pubbaṃ pubbaṃ anūti vuttaṃ hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti dīghanti vuttaassāsavasena. Purimā purimāti purimā purimā sati. Etena pubbantipadassa attho vutto hoti. Pacchimā pacchimāti satiyeva. Etena anūtipadassa attho vutto hoti. Ubhayena pubbañca anu ca paricitāti attho vutto hoti. Upari soḷasa vatthūni vitthāretvā vacanato idha saṅkhipitvā ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī’’ti antimameva dassitaṃ. Yasmā sikhāppattabhāvanassa sabbāpi ānāpānassatiyo punappunaṃ yathāruci pavattanato anuparicitāpi honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘aññamaññaṃ paricitā ceva honti anuparicitā cā’’ti.
“如义”就是按照事物本来的样子。“自调伏义”是指在证得阿罗汉道的那一刹那,自己已没有烦恼随眠。“止义”是清凉的意思。“般涅槃义”是通过烦恼的般涅槃来说的。“神通义”是就通达一切法而言。“遍知义”等则是依照道智的作用来说的。“谛现观义”是从一次性彻见四圣谛来说的。“住立于灭义”是就作为所缘而言的。巴利
Yathatthāti yathāsabhāvatthā. Attadamathatthoti arahattamaggakkhaṇe attano nibbisevanattho. Samathatthoti sītibhāvattho. Parinibbāpanatthoti kilesaparinibbānena. Abhiññatthoti sabbadhammavasena. Pariññatthādayo maggañāṇakiccavasena. Saccābhisamayattho catunnaṃ saccānaṃ ekapaṭivedhadassanavasena. Nirodhe patiṭṭhāpakattho ārammaṇakaraṇavasena.
即使没有“佛”这个词本身,为了指出“那位觉者就是佛”,还是说了“佛”。“自生者”:不靠别人教导,自己就达到了这样的境界。“无师者”:这是对“自生者”这个词的含义解释。因为凡是无需老师指导而自己证悟诸谛的人,就叫做“自生者”。“于先前未曾听闻之法”等语,是在说明“无师者”的含义。“未曾听闻”:指没有从老师那里听闻过。“亲自”:就是自己本身。“已正觉”:指彻底地、正确地证悟了。在那里“证得一切知性”:在那些谛中证得了一切知性。正如证悟诸谛的人成为一切知者,因为已证悟诸谛,所以这样说。也有“已得一切知性”的读法。“于诸力得自在”:在十种如来力中获得自在。凡是如此成就的人,就说他是“佛”。其中,依于一切法中无障碍智之相、无上解脱之证得所修习的五蕴相续而施设的,或者依于一切知性之基础即诸谛之现等觉而施设的,这种有情中的特殊者就是佛。至此,从义理上已说明了佛的含义。巴利
Buddhotipadassa abhāvepi buddhenātipade yo so buddho, taṃ niddisitukāmena buddhoti vuttaṃ. Sayambhūti upadesaṃ vinā sayameva bhūto. Anācariyakoti sayambhūpadassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Yo hi ācariyaṃ vinā saccāni paṭivijjhati, so sayambhū nāma hoti. Pubbe ananussutesūtiādi anācariyakabhāvassa atthappakāsanaṃ. Ananussutesūti ācariyaṃ ananussutesu. Sāmanti sayameva. Abhisambujjhīti bhusaṃ sammā paṭivijjhi. Tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇīti tesu ca saccesu sabbaññubhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Yathā saccāni paṭivijjhantā sabbaññuno honti, tathā saccānaṃ paṭividdhattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbaññutaṃ pattotipi pāṭho. Balesu ca vasībhāvanti dasasu ca tathāgatabalesu issarabhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Yo so evaṃ bhūto, so buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbesu dhammesu appaṭihatañāṇanimittānuttaravimokkhādhigamaparibhāvitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ upādāya paṇṇattiko, sabbaññutapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā saccābhisambodhimupādāya paṇṇattiko sattaviseso buddho. Ettāvatā atthato buddhavibhāvanā katā hoti.
162 现在从文句上来说明“佛”这个词,先提出“佛是以什么意义而称为佛”等问题。在这里,就像世间把“已经理解的人”称为“理解者”,同样地,因为已经觉悟了诸谛,所以称为佛。又像“吹动树叶的风”被称为“叶吹风”,同样地,因为能使众生觉悟,所以称为佛。由于具有一切知性,也就是以能够觉悟一切法的智慧而称为佛,这样说。由于具有一切见性,也就是以智慧之眼见到了一切法,所以称为佛,这样说。由于不须他人引导,也就是因为不是由他人所能令觉,而是自己觉悟,所以称为佛,这样说。由于遍开,也就是因为以种种功德遍开,犹如莲花开放之义,所以称为佛,这样说。由于漏尽,也就是以“漏尽”等六种方式,因舍断使心收缩之法而如睡醒之人,因为一切烦恼之睡已尽而觉醒,所以称为佛,这样说。“诸行”与“已解”之义,从意义为一来说,是以“已解”一词的一部分,即此义。由于没有渴爱之染与见之染,所以称为无染。因为一切烦恼连同习气都已断除,所以以决定之语特别说明,说“决定离贪”等。决定无烦恼,即由贪瞋痴等一切残余烦恼而无所烦恼。已行一乘道者称为佛,因为“行”之义的诸界有“觉”之义,有“觉”义的诸界也有“行”义,因此因为已行一乘道,所以称为佛,这样说。这里所谓“一乘道”,即——巴利
162. Idāni byañjanato vibhāvento buddhoti kenaṭṭhena buddhotiādimāha. Tattha yathā loke avagantā avagatoti vuccati, evaṃ bujjhitā saccānīti buddho. Yathā paṇṇasosā vātā paṇṇasusāti vuccanti, evaṃ bodhetā pajāyāti buddho. Sabbaññutāya buddhoti sabbadhammabujjhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbadassāvitāya buddhoti sabbadhammānaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anaññaneyyatāyabuddhoti aññena abodhanīyato sayameva buddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Visavitāya buddhoti nānāguṇavisavanato padumamiva vikasanaṭṭhena buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddhotiādīhi chahi pariyāyehi cittasaṅkocakaradhammappahānena niddakkhayavibuddho puriso viya sabbakilesaniddakkhayavibuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekattā saṅkhātenāti vacanassa koṭṭhāsenāti attho. Taṇhālepadiṭṭhilepābhāvena nirupalepasaṅkhātena. Savāsanānaṃ sabbakilesānaṃ pahīnattā ekantavacanena visesetvā ekantavītarāgotiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantanikkilesoti rāgadosamohāvasesehi sabbakilesehi nikkileso. Ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddhoti gamanatthānaṃ dhātūnaṃ bujjhanatthattā bujjhanatthāpi dhātuyo gamanatthā honti, tasmā ekāyanamaggaṃ gatattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekāyanamaggoti cettha –
道、路、途径、直道、坦途、通道。
船、渡桥、筏、褥、渡口。巴利
‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetu ca, kullo ca bhisi saṅkamo’’ti . (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 101) –
在道的许多名称当中,这里是用了“行道”这个名称来说的。所以意思是:这是唯一的道,不是分成两条的路。或者也可以说,这是一个人应当走的道,所以叫“一乘道”。“一个人”是指舍弃了群体交往,以远离的心。“应当走”是指应当去实践。或者,“依此而行”就叫“行道”,意思是从轮回走向涅槃。“某些人的行道”就是“一乘道”。“某些人”指最胜者,而一切众生中最胜的就是正自觉者,所以说“一乘道”就是正自觉者所行的道。或者,“行”就叫“行道”,是进行、持续的意思。“在一个地方行道”就叫“一乘道”,意思是只在佛陀的教法当中行道,不在别处。另外,“行向一个”就叫“一乘道”,意思是前期虽然以种种方式修行,后期只趋向同一个涅槃,所以说“一乘道”就是通往同一涅槃的道。“独自证得了无上正自觉,所以是佛”:不是靠别人让他觉悟才成为佛,而是自己证得了无上正自觉,所以称为佛。因为摧毁了无明、获得了智慧,所以是佛。“觉”“佛陀”“菩提”这些是同一个意思的不同说法。就像因为具有蓝色、红色等属性,就说这是蓝布、红布;同样,因为具有觉的功德,就说这是佛。巴利
Maggassa bahūsu nāmesu ayananāmena vutto. Tasmā ekamaggabhūto maggo, na dvedhāpathabhūtoti attho. Atha vā ekena ayitabbo maggoti ekāyanamaggo. Ekenāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya pavivekena cittena. Ayitabboti paṭipajjitabbo. Ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho. Ekesaṃ ayano ekāyano. Eketi seṭṭhā, sabbasattaseṭṭhā ca sammāsambuddhā, tasmā ekāyanamaggoti sammāsambuddhānaṃ ayanabhūto maggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ ayano maggoti ekāyanamaggo, ekasmiṃyeva buddhasāsane pavattamāno maggo, na aññatthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Api ca ekaṃ ayatīti ekāyano, pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā ekāyanamaggoti ekanibbānagamanamaggoti attho. Eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddhoti na parehi buddhattā buddho, kiṃ pana sayameva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddhoti buddhi buddhaṃ bodhoti pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Tattha yathā nīlarattaguṇayogā nīlo paṭo ratto paṭoti vuccati, evaṃ buddhaguṇayogā buddhoti ñāpetuṃ vuttaṃ.
从此以后,“佛,这不是名字”等话,是为了让人明白“这个施设是随顺意义而安立的”才说的。其中,“友”是朋友,“伴”是同伴,“臣”是辅臣,“仆”是仆从,“眷”是父系亲属,“血亲”是母系亲属,“沙门”是出家修行的人,“婆罗门”是称“尊”的人,或者是指已经止息罪恶、排除罪恶的人,“天神”是帝释等天众以及梵天。“解脱边际者”中,“解脱”是阿拉汉道,“解脱的边际”是阿拉汉果,住于这个解脱边际的,就叫“解脱边际者”。因为一切知的境界是通过阿拉汉道成就的,在阿拉汉果生起时就成就了,所以一切知的境界就存在于解脱边际之中。那个依相而安立的名称,也是存在于解脱边际中的名称,因此说:“这是诸佛世尊的解脱边际者。”在菩提树下,与证得一切知智的同时——也就是在大菩提树下那个刹那,与证得一切知智同时——这种亲证的施设,是依阿拉汉果的证得,或者依一切法的证得而成立的施设。这所谓的“佛”,也就是这个“佛”的施设,是从文句上阐明佛。巴利
Tato paraṃ buddhoti netaṃ nāmantiādi ‘‘atthamanugatā ayaṃ paññattī’’ti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha mittā sahāyā. Amaccā bhaccā. Ñātī pitupakkhikā. Sālohitā mātupakkhikā. Samaṇā pabbajjūpagatā. Brāhmaṇā bhovādino, samitapāpabāhitapāpā vā. Devatā sakkādayo brahmāno ca. Vimokkhantikanti vimokkho arahattamaggo, vimokkhassa anto arahattaphalaṃ, tasmiṃ vimokkhante bhavaṃ vimokkhantikaṃ nāma. Sabbaññubhāvo hi arahattamaggena sijjhati, arahattaphalodaye siddho hoti, tasmā sabbaññubhāvo vimokkhante bhavo hoti. Taṃ nemittikampi nāmaṃ vimokkhante bhavaṃ nāma hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantāna’’nti. Bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhāti mahābodhirukkhamūle yathāvuttakkhaṇe sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhena saha. Sacchikā paññattīti arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya, sabbadhammasacchikiriyāya vā jātā paññatti. Yadidaṃ buddhoti yā ayaṃ buddhoti paññatti, ayaṃ byañjanato buddhavibhāvanā.
对于“如佛所教导”这一偈句,在词语分解里所说的含义,可以这样对应:入出息念们,正如佛所教导的,以某种方式被教导。这里“如”这个词包含了十种“如”的含义,以及表示方式的“如”和表示自性的“如”;因为同形省略的缘故,把它们合为一个,说成“如”,应当这样理解。而在词语分解中,由于各个“如”的含义都分别与“教导”搭配,所以用了单数的“教导”。巴利
‘‘Yathā buddhena desitā’’tigāthāpādassa pana iminā padabhājanīye vuttatthena ayaṃ saṃsandanā – ānāpānassatiyo ca yathā buddhena desitā, yena pakārena desitā. Yathāsaddena saṅgahitā dasa yathatthā ca yathā buddhena desitā, yena pakārena desitāti pakāratthassa ca yathāsaddassa, sabhāvatthassa ca yathāsaddassa sarūpekasesavasena ekasesaṃ katvā ‘‘yathā’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Padabhājanīye panassa yathatthesu ekekassa yojanāvasena ‘‘desito’’ti ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
因为已经说过“他要么是在家人,要么是出家人”,所以开头这个词里说的也就是“他要么是在家人,要么是出家人”。世间这个词的意思也已经说过了。“令显现”的意思是让自己的智慧清楚地显现出来。“因已正觉”是指连声闻波罗蜜智也已经通达了。“照耀”指欲界世间。“辉耀”指色界世间。“令显现”指无色界世间。巴利
‘‘Soti gahaṭṭho vā hoti pabbajito vā’’ti vuttattā ādipadepi yassa gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vāti vuttameva hoti. Lokattho vuttoyeva. Pabhāsetīti attano ñāṇassa pākaṭaṃ karotīti attho . Abhisambuddhattāti sāvakapāramiñāṇenapi paṭividdhabhāvena. Obhāsetīti kāmāvacarabhūtaṃ lokaṃ. Bhāsetīti rūpāvacarabhūtaṃ lokaṃ. Pabhāsetīti arūpāvacarabhūtaṃ lokaṃ.
圣智:就是阿拉汉道智。离雾:就是从雾中解脱出来。雾,称为雾气。也有写成离地的读法。离烟尘:就是从烟和尘埃中解脱出来。离罗睺执:因为罗睺是月亮附近的垢染,所以用两个前缀分别说明。照耀:是具有光辉的意思。辉耀:是具有热力的意思。显耀:是具有美丽的意思。如此如此:就是像这样。然而,月亮自己照耀、辉耀、显耀,照亮此空间世间;比丘也以智慧照耀、辉耀、显耀,以智慧照亮这蕴等世间。因此,两处都不说令照耀,而只说照耀。这样说了,理由也就说到了。为什么不取极其光明闪耀的太阳作譬喻,而取月亮作譬喻呢?应当知道,因为止息一切烦恼热恼、内心寂静的比丘,具有与寂静功德相应的月亮譬喻,所以取月亮作譬喻才恰当。这样称赞了以入出息念修习成就的瑜伽行者之后,就把这十三种清净智总结显示出来。巴利
Ariyañāṇanti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Mahikā muttoti mahikāya mutto. Mahikāti nīhāro vuccati. Mahiyā muttotipi pāṭho. Dhūmarajā muttoti dhūmato ca rajato ca mutto. Rāhugahaṇā vippamuttoti rāhuno candassa āsannupakkilesattā dvīhi upasaggehi visesetvā vuttaṃ. Bhāsate iti saobhāsaṭṭhena. Tapate iti satejaṭṭhena. Virocate iti ruciraṭṭhena. Evamevanti evaṃ evaṃ. Yasmā pana candopi sayaṃ bhāsanto tapanto virocanto imaṃ okāsalokaṃ obhāseti, bhikkhu ca paññāya bhāsanto tapanto virocanto imaṃ khandhādilokaṃ paññāya obhāseti, tasmā ubhayatrāpi ‘‘bhāsetī’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhāsate’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Evañhi vutte hetuatthopi vutto hoti. Ativisadatarābhasūriyopamaṃ aggahetvā kasmā candopamā gahitāti ce? Sabbakilesapariḷāhavūpasamena santassa bhikkhuno santaguṇayuttacandopamā anucchavikāti gahitāti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ ānāpānassatibhāvanāsiddhisādhakaṃ yogāvacaraṃ thunitvā imāni terasa vodāne ñāṇānīti tāni ñāṇāni nigametvā dassetīti.
5. 念作者智解说的注释巴利
5. Satokāriñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
163 在“念所作智”的解说中,论母里说的“此处比丘”,就是指在这教法中的比丘。这里“此处”这个词,既点明能成就一切种类入出息念定的那个人所依止的教法,也否定了在其他教法中有同样的情况。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,只有在这里才有沙门……其他外道的沙门那里,是空的,没有沙门。”(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)巴利
163. Satokāriñāṇaniddese mātikāyaṃ idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhi ettha idha-saddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano, aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241).
或者去森林里,或者去树下,或者去空寂之处——这句话是在说明,他选择了与修习入出息念定相适应的住处。因为这位比丘的心,长久以来一直散乱在色等种种所缘上,不愿意升到入出息念定这个所缘上来,就像一辆由狡猾公牛拉着的车,只会往歪路上跑。所以,就好比有个牧牛人,想调伏一头喝了狡猾母牛的全部奶水而长大的顽劣牛犊,就把它从母牛身边拉开,在一边钉下一根大柱子,用绳子把它绑在那里。那牛犊就算东挣西跳,也逃不掉,最后只能靠近那根柱子坐下或躺下。同样地,这位比丘想调伏自己那颗长久以来被色等所缘的滋味养大、变得顽劣的心,就把它从色等所缘上拉开,带进森林、树下或空寂之处,在那里用正念的绳子,把心绑在入出息这个柱子上。这样一来,他的心虽然东挣西跳,却找不到过去习惯的所缘,又挣不断正念的绳子逃不走,就只能通过近行和安止的方式,靠近并安住在这个所缘上。因此古德说:巴利
Araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vāti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya, athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像有人在这里,把一头需要调伏的牛犊,用绳子绑在柱子上。
应当这样把自己的心牢牢系在念的所缘上。巴利
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.217; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107) –
这样,他的坐卧处就适合修习。或者说,因为入出息念这个业处在业处的分类中是首要的,是一切佛陀、独觉佛、佛陀声闻弟子殊胜证悟和现法乐住的立足处,如果不离开充满男女、象马等声音的村庄周边,就不容易修习,因为声音是禅那的刺。而在没有村庄的森林里,瑜伽行者容易掌握这个业处,成就入出息四禅那后,以它作为基础,观察诸行,证得最高的果位——阿罗汉果。因此,世尊在指示适合他的坐卧处时说了“去到森林”等话。那位长老也是如此。巴利
Evamassa taṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ bhāvetuṃ saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatukkajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tasmā tassa anurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisanto bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha, tatheva thero.
世尊就像一位建筑大师。建筑大师先观察地形,仔细考察之后,指示说:“在这里建城。”城市顺利建成后,他从王室得到极大的恭敬。同样,世尊观察了适合修行者的住处后,指示说:“在这里应当精勤修习业处。”修行者在那里精勤修习业处,逐渐证得阿拉汉果之后,世尊就得到极大的恭敬,人们说:“那位世尊确实是正自觉者!”而这位比丘被称为“如豹”。就像大豹王在森林里,依靠草丛、树林或山丛隐藏自己,捕捉野牛、麋鹿、山羌、野猪等野兽;同样,这位在阿兰若等处精勤修习业处的比丘,应当知道,他依次证得入流道、一来道、不来道、阿拉汉道以及圣果。因此,古德说:巴利
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evamevaṃ yogāvacarassa anurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati, tato tattha kammaṭṭhānamanuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu ‘‘dīpisadiso’’ti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evamevaṃ ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalāni ca gaṇhātīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像一种叫豹的野兽,先潜伏起来,再扑捉鹿;
同样,这位佛子精勤修习、具备观照。
进入森林后,他摘取最殊胜的果实。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhate mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (mi. pa. 6.1.5);
为了向他说明适合发挥精进力的阿兰若坐卧处,世尊说了“到了阿兰若,或……”等话。巴利
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
在这其中,“去到林野”是指去到任何具有上述特征、能体验远离之乐的林野。“去到树下”是指去到树旁。“去到空寂之处”是指去到空旷、远离的地方。在这里,除了林野和树下之外,去到其余七种坐卧处,也都可以称为“去到空寂之处”。因为坐卧处共有九种。正如《分别论》中所说:“他亲近远离的坐卧处——林野、树下、山岳、峡谷、山窟、冢间、林莽、露天、草堆。”(《分别论》508)这样,为他指示了适合三季、适合界与性行、且适合修习入出息念的坐卧处之后,为了进一步指出既不昏沉也不掉举的寂静威仪,而说“他坐下”。接着,为了显示他坐姿的稳固、呼吸运作的堪能性以及执取所缘的方法,而说“结跏趺坐……”等。其中,“结跏趺坐”是指完全盘起双腿的坐姿。“结……”意为系缚、盘结。“端正身体”是指挺直上半身,让十八节脊椎骨节与节之间稳稳相接。因为这样坐着的人,他的皮膜、肌肉、筋腱就不会弯曲。当它们不弯曲时,那些原本可能因弯曲而刹那刹那生起的受就不会生起。当那些受不生起时,心就能专一,业处不会退失,而能增长、广大。巴利
Tattha araññagatoti upari vuttalakkhaṇaṃ yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. Rukkhamūlagatoti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. Suññāgāragatoti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanaṃ gatopi ‘‘suññāgāragato’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Navavidhañhi senāsanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘so vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajati araññaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ pabbataṃ kandaraṃ giriguhaṃ susānaṃ vanapatthaṃ abbhokāsaṃ palālapuñja’’nti (vibha. 508). Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santamiriyāpathaṃ upadisanto nisīdatīti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasamatthataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvātiādimāha. Tattha pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa dhammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati.
把念安放在面前,意思是把念安放在业处所缘的正前方。他具念地入息,具念地出息,意思是那位比丘这样坐下来,这样把念安立起来之后,不让那个念丢失,只是具念地入息、具念地出息。这句话说的是,他成了一个保持正念而行的人。巴利
Parimukhaṃsatiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. So satova assasati sato passasatīti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto sato eva assasati sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明他通过哪些方式成为保持正念而行的人,接着说了“长地入息”等话。其中,“长地入息”是指产生长的入息。短的也同样如此。不过,它们的长短应当根据时间来理解。因为有时候人们像大象、蛇等那样,按时间长短来入息和出息,有时候又像狗、兔子等那样,入息和出息很短。如果不是这样,那些极其细微的入息和出息就不会被称为长或短了。因此应当知道:当它们在长时间内进入和出去时,就是“长”;在短时间内进入和出去时,就是“短”。在这里,这位比丘依照前面所说的九种方式,当长地入息和出息时,他清楚地知道:“我长地入息,我长地出息”;短的情况也同样如此。巴利
Idāni yehi pakārehi satokārī hoti, te pakāre dassetuṃ dīghaṃ vā assasantotiādimāha. Tattha dīghaṃ vā assasantoti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattayanto. Tathā rassaṃ. Yā pana nesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā kālavasena veditabbā. Kadāci hi manussā hatthiahiādayo viya kālavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca, kadāci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ. Aññathā hi cuṇṇavicuṇṇā assāsapassāsā dīgharassā nāma na honti . Tasmā te dīghaṃ kālaṃ pavisantā ca nikkhamantā ca dīghā, rassaṃ kālaṃ pavisantā ca nikkhamantā ca rassāti veditabbā. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu upari vuttehi navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto ca passasanto ca dīghaṃ assasāmi, passasāmīti pajānāti, tathā rassaṃ.
当他这样清楚了知时——巴利
Evaṃ pajānato ca –
入息有长的,也有短的,出息同样如此;
比丘的鼻端上,这四种(入息、出息、长短等)仅在运作。巴利
‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso, passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, nāsikaggeva bhikkhuno’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.219; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
应当知道:在九种方式中,只要通过其中任何一种方式,身随观念处的修习就能成就。
“觉知整个呼吸身,我将吸气——他这样学。”“觉知整个呼吸身,我将呼气——他这样学。”意思是:让整个吸气身的开始、中间、结尾都被清楚地知道、明显地了知,他这样学“我将吸气”;让整个呼气身的开始、中间、结尾都被清楚地知道、明显地了知,他这样学“我将呼气”。这样清楚地知道、明显地了知时,他以与智相应的心吸气,也呼气。因此说“我将吸气、我将呼气——他这样学”。
确实,有的比丘对吸气身或呼气身,只有开始部分明显,中间和结尾不明显。他只能把握开始部分,在中间和结尾上就感到吃力。有的比丘只有中间部分明显,开始和结尾不明显,他只能把握中间部分,在开始和结尾上就感到吃力。有的比丘只有结尾部分明显,开始和中间不明显,他只能把握结尾部分,在开始和中间上就感到吃力。有的比丘则全部都明显,他能够把握全部,在任何地方都不感到吃力。为了指出应当成为这样的比丘,所以说了“觉知整个呼吸身”等话。巴利
Navannañcassa ākārānaṃ ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passasissāmīti sikkhatīti sakalassa assāsakāyassādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca. Tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe (visuddhi. 1.219; pārā. 2.165) assāsakāye, passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. So majjhameva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādipariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti , na katthaci kilamati. Tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī’’tiādi.
在这里,“学”的意思是:这样努力、这样精勤。或者,一个处于这种状态的人的戒防护,就是这里的增上戒学;一个处于这种状态的人的定,就是增上心学;一个处于这种状态的人的慧,就是增上慧学。他以那样的念、那样的作意,在这个所缘上学习、练习、修习、反复修习这三学。这里应当这样理解其含义。
其中,因为按照前面的方式,只是单纯地吸气、呼气,不需要做别的什么;但从这里开始,就必须致力于生起智等。所以,前面用现在时说了“他了知‘我吸气’、了知‘我呼气’”这样的经文;从这里开始,为了显示应当做的生起智等行相,就以“觉知一切身,我将吸气”等的方式,用未来时来建立经文。应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha sikkhatīti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha yasmā purimanayena kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva ca, na aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ, ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha ‘‘assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāti’’cceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ā-kārassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmī’’tiādinā nayena anāgatakālavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
他这样训练自己:平息粗重的身行——也就是入息和出息——在平息、止息、灭去、寂静粗重的身行时,我训练自己吸气,训练自己呼气。巴利
Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ…pe… sikkhatīti oḷārikaṃ assāsapassāsasaṅkhātaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
在这里,应当这样理解粗重与微细,以及平息:这位比丘在先前还没有收摄身心的时候,身体和心都是躁动不安的,是粗重的。因为身心粗重、尚未平息,入出息也就粗重,运行得强烈有力,鼻孔都不够用,只能靠嘴来吸气和呼气。可是,当他的身体和心都被收摄之后,它们就变得寂静、平息了。身心平息之后,入出息就变得微细,运行到需要去审察“到底还有没有”的程度。就像一个人跑完步,或者从山上下来,或者从头上卸下重担之后站着,他的入出息是粗重的,鼻孔不够用,只能靠嘴吸气和呼气。但当他消除了疲劳,洗了澡、喝了水,把湿布搭在胸口,躺在清凉的树荫下时,他的入出息就变得微细,到了需要审察“到底还有没有”的程度。同样地,这位比丘在还没有收摄的时候……应当这样详细说明。因为他在先前还没有收摄的时候,并没有“我要让粗重的身行平息”这样的意欲、策励和作意;而在收摄的时候,就有了。因此,从还没有收摄到已经收摄,他的身行就变得微细。所以古师们说:巴利
Tatrevaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā – imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti oḷārikā. Kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho, natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā honti. Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā pabbatā vā orohitvā mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti ‘‘atthi nu kho, natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā, evamevaṃ imassa bhikkhuno apariggahitakāleti vitthāretabbaṃ. Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikāro natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
当身体和心都被搅动起来时,它就转得特别粗猛。
身体不躁动时,呼吸就变得微细。巴利
‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati; Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.220; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
在执取时也是粗重的,在初禅近行时是微细的。在那时也是粗重的,在初禅时是微细的。在初禅和第二禅近行时是粗重的,在第二禅时是微细的。在第二禅和第三禅近行时是粗重的,在第三禅时是微细的。在第三禅和第四禅近行时是粗重的,在第四禅时达到极其微细、几乎不再运作。这是长部诵者和相应部诵者的主张。巴利
Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānūpacāre sukhumo. Tasmimpi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ mataṃ.
中部诵者则认为:在初禅里是粗重的,在第二禅的近行里才是微细的。就这样,从较低的禅那到较高的禅那近行,他们都主张越来越微细。不过,按照所有诵者共同认可的说法:未执取时所生起的身行,在执取时便止息;执取时所生起的身行,在初禅近行时止息……乃至第四禅近行时所生起的身行,在第四禅时止息。以上是就止方面的次第。巴利
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānūpacāre sukhumo’’ti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Sabbesaṃyeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati, pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānūpacāre…pe… catutthajjhānūpacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva samathe nayo.
在修观时,还没有执取(所缘)的阶段所生起的身行是粗重的,在执取四大种时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在执取所造色时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在执取一切色法时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在执取无色法时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在执取色法与无色法时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在执取缘时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在观见有缘的名色时则是微细的。那(身行)也是粗重的,在以相为所缘的观中则是微细的。那(身行)在羸弱的观中为粗重,在强力的观中则为微细。在这里,应当依照前面所说的方式,了知前一个阶段由后一个阶段而止息。如此,在这里应当了知粗重与微细,以及止息。以上是就身随观所说的第一组四法,逐词解释其含义。巴利
Vipassanāyaṃ pana apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpadassane sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇika vipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena paṭippassaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā paṭippassaddhi ca veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
不过,这里只有第一组四法,是就初学者修业处而说的;其余三组四法,则是就已在其中证得禅那的人,通过受随观、心随观、法随观而说的。因此,想要以入出息四禅那为近因的观,连同无碍解一起证得阿罗汉果的善男子初学者,应当修习这个业处之后,依照《清净道论》所说的方法,完成戒清净等一切应做的事,然后在具足七支的老师面前,学习五节业处。这五节就是:学习、遍问、现起、安止、相。其中,学习就是对业处的学习;遍问就是对业处的遍问;现起就是业处的现起;安止就是业处的安止;相就是业处的相,也就是说“这个业处有这样的相”,即把握业处的本质。巴利
Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena, tasmā imaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānacatukkajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena visuddhimagge vuttanayena sīlaparisodhanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā sattaṅgasamannāgatassa ācariyassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Tatrime pañca sandhayo uggaho paripucchā upaṭṭhānaṃ appanā lakkhaṇanti. Tattha uggaho nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ. Paripucchā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanaṃ. Upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ. Appanā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa appanā. Lakkhaṇaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ, ‘‘evaṃ lakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样学习五节业处时,自己不会疲倦,也不会让老师感到烦扰。所以,应该先请老师只教一点点,然后自己花很长时间反复温习。这样学完五节业处之后,无论是在老师身边还是在别处,都要避开有十八种过失的精舍,住在具备五种条件的住处。然后,要断除那些细小的牵挂,吃完饭、处理好饭后的事务,消除饭后的昏沉,舒舒服服地坐下来,通过忆念三宝的功德让心里生起欢喜,对从老师那里学来的内容连一句都不遗漏,接着就对这个入出息念业处作意。这里的作意方法如下:巴利
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheseti. Tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahuṃ kālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ācariyassa santike vā aññattha vā aṭṭhārasa dosayutte vihāre vajjetvā pañcaṅgasamannāgate senāsane vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā sukhanisinnena ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi aparihāpentena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
计数、跟随、接触、安止、观察;
坏灭的清净,以及对这些的随观。巴利
‘‘Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā; Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanā’’ti.
在这其中,计数就是计数本身;随逐就是跟随;触就是所触之处;安止就是安止;观察就是观;转出就是道;清净就是果;对它们的反观就是省察。在这里,刚开始修行的善男子首先应当通过计数来作意这个业处。但计数时,不应放在五以下,也不应带到十以上,中间不应出现断裂。如果把计数放在五以下,心就会在狭窄的空间里挣扎跳动,就像牛群被困在狭窄的牛栏里一样。如果把计数带到十以上,心就会只是依赖计数本身。如果中间出现断裂,心就会动摇,想:“我的业处到底达到顶点了吗,还是没有?”所以,应当避免这些过失来计数。巴利
Tattha gaṇanāti gaṇanāyeva. Anubandhanāti anugamanā. Phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Ṭhapanāti appanā. Sallakkhaṇāti vipassanā. Vivaṭṭanāti maggo. Pārisuddhīti phalaṃ. Tesañca paṭipassanāti paccavekkhaṇā. Tattha iminā ādikammikena kulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇentena pana pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ, dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ, antarā khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannaṃ upari nentassa gaṇananissitova cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati, tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
计数时,首先要像量谷人那样慢慢地数。量谷的人把一纳利装满,说一声“一”,就倒出来;再装的时候,如果看到一点杂物,就把它扔掉,嘴里说“一、一”。数“二、二”等等时也是这样。同样,在这里,入出息中无论哪一种现起,都把它捉住,作“一、一”等等,一直到“十、十”,只是随着每一次生起而标记、计数。他这样数的时候,出气和入气都会变得清楚分明。巴利
Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya dhaññamāpakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati, puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Eseva nayo dve dvetiādīsu. Evamevaṃ imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’ntiādiṃ katvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassa evaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
这时,他应该放弃像量谷人那样慢吞吞的计数方式,改用像牧牛人那样快速的计数方式。就像有个聪明的牧牛人,衣襟里兜着石子之类的东西,手里拿着绳子和棍子,清早就到牛栏去,拍拍牛背,坐在门闩柱的顶上。每当有牛走到门口,他就丢一颗石子数一下:“一、二。”整夜挤在狭窄地方受苦的牛群,出栏时互相推挤,争先恐后地一群群涌出来。他也跟着飞快地数:“三、四、五、十。”同样,这位修行者按前面说的方法计数时,入出息变得明显之后,就会快速地一次又一次地流动。那时他了知“它们一次又一次地流动”,于是不执取内也不执取外,只取每一次到达鼻门的气息,快速地数:“一、二、三、四、五”“一、二、三、四、五、六”“一、二、三、四、五、六、七”……乃至“八、九、十”。在以计数为所缘的业处中,正是靠计数之力,心才得以专一,就像依靠船桨的支撑,把船稳住在急流之中。巴利
Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gopālakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Cheko hi gopālako sakkharādayo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvāraṃ pattaṃ pattaṃyeva gāvaṃ ‘‘eko dve’’ti sakkharaṃ khipitvā khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjapuñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva, evamassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tato tena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca aggahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca, eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha, eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha nava dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanāpaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanabaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti arittupatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭhapanamiva.
当他这样快速地一次次计数时,业处就像不间断地运转一样显现出来。这时,他知道了“它不间断地运转”,就不应该再执取内风或外风,而应该按照前面说的方法,继续快速地一次次计数。因为,如果跟着进入内部的风把心带进去,内部就会像被风冲击、充满脂肪一样。如果跟着出去外部的风把心带出去,心就会散乱在外面的种种所缘上。然而,只有把念安放在每一次接触的地方来修习,修习才能成就。因此说:“不应该执取内风和外风,应该按照前面说的方法,继续快速地一次次计数。”巴利
Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattatī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Antopavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti. Bahinikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
那么,这个计数到底要数到什么时候呢?直到不靠计数,念也能稳稳安住在入出息这个所缘上为止。因为计数的目的,本来就是为了切断向外散乱的寻,让念安住在入出息这个所缘上。巴利
Kīvaciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahi visaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati saṇṭhāpanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
像这样用计数来作意之后,就应该用随逐来作意。所谓随逐,就是放下计数,以念不间断地跟随入息和出息。不过,这并不是要跟随气息的初、中、后三个阶段。因为如果跟随初、中、后三个阶段会有什么过患,前面已经讲过了。巴利
Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasi katvā anubandhanāya manasi kātabbaṃ. Anubandhanā nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ. Tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Ādimajjhapariyosānāni tassānugamane ādīnavā ca heṭṭhā vuttāyeva.
因此,以随逐方式作意的人,不应该按初、中、后的方式来作意,而应该按触的方式和安住的方式来作意。因为,并不存在像计数与随逐那样,把触和安住单独分开的作意;当他在每一个被触到的位置上计数时,他就是在以计数和触两种方式作意。就在那个地方,他放下计数,以念随逐那些息,并以安止的方式令心安住,这时就可以说他在以随逐、触和安住的方式作意。这个含义,应当通过注疏中所说的跛者喻和守门人喻,以及这里经文中所说的锯喻来理解。巴利
Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena na ādimajjhapariyosānavasena manasi kātabbaṃ, apica kho phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi, phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti, tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto, appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti vuccati. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāsu vuttapaṅguḷadovārikopamāhi idheva pāḷiyaṃ vuttakakacūpamāya ca veditabbo.
这里有一个跛脚人的比喻。就像有个跛脚的人,母子俩正在玩秋千,他们把秋千推出去之后,他就坐在秋千柱脚下,随着秋千板一来一回,他依次看到秋千板的两端和中间,但他并不是为了看清两端和中间而忙着。同样地,比丘以念的力量安住在系缚所缘的柱脚处,把入出息这个秋千推出去之后,就在那里的相上以念安坐,随着入出息依次来去,在每一个触到的地方,以念跟随入出息的初、中、后,就在那里把心安放下来观察,他同样不是为了看清它们而忙着。这就是跛脚人的比喻。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ paṅguḷopamā – seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolāthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, evameva bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanatthambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisīdanto kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattheva (visuddhi. 1.225) cittaṃ ṭhapetvā passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti. Ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
这个则是守门人的比喻:就像守门人不盘问城内与城外的人——“你是谁?从哪里来?要去哪里?你手里拿的是什么?”——因为那些不是他的职责,他只盘问每一个到达城门口的人。同样,对这位比丘来说,已经进入体内的风和已经出去的风都不是他的职责,只有每一次到达门口的风才是他的职责。这就是守门人的比喻。巴利
Ayaṃ pana dovārikopamā – seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’’ti na vīmaṃsati. Na hi tassa te bhārā, dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati, evameva imassa bhikkhuno antopaviṭṭhavātā ca bahinikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti ayaṃ dovārikopamā.
“锯喻”在这里其实已经按照“以相为入出息……”这种方式说过了。不过在这里应当知道,它的用处只是:以不断到来之法而不作意而已。巴利
Kakacūpamā pana ‘‘nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.159) nayena idha vuttāyeva. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ.
修这个业处的人,有的人不用多久就生起了相,并且成就了具备其余禅支的安止定。而有的人仅仅依靠计数来作意,从开始作意的时候起,就像身体紧绷的人坐到床或椅子上,床椅就会下弯、发出声响,垫褥也会起皱;身体不紧绷的人坐下去,床椅不会下弯,不会发出声响,垫褥也不会起皱,床椅就像塞满了棉花一样。为什么?因为身体不紧绷就轻快。同样地,依靠计数来作意,从开始作意的时候起,随着逐渐地粗重的入出息止息,身体的沉重疲惫平息下来,身体和心都变得轻快,身体就好像能在空中跳跃一样。巴利
Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci na cireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhuti yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti . Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti, evamevaṃ gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
当他的粗重入出息停止时,心就以微细入出息的相为所缘而运转。当那个相也停止时,心仍然次第不断地以比它更细、更细的入出息相为所缘而运转。这个道理,应当通过后面所说的铜盆譬喻来理解。巴利
Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati . Tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ assāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Svāyamattho upari vuttakaṃsathālopamāya veditabbo.
就像其他业处越往上修会越来越清晰,这个业处却不是这样。这个业处越往上修,反而变得越来越微细,甚至不再现前。当它这样不现前的时候,那位比丘不应该想“我要去问老师”或者“我的业处现在丢了”,然后就从座位上站起来走掉。因为改变姿势走开的话,业处就会变成全新的。所以,应该就按照原来坐着的姿势,从那里把业处取回来。巴利
Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati. Evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ tena bhikkhunā ‘‘ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā uṭṭhāyāsanā na gantabbaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
这里取回业处的方法是:那位比丘知道业处不现起之后,应当这样思惟:“这些入出息,在哪里有,在哪里没有?谁有,谁没有?”
他这样思惟时,便知道:“这些入出息在母胎里没有,在沉入水中的人身上没有,同样,在无想有情、死者、证得第四禅那的人、具足色界与无色界生存的人、以及证得灭尽定的人身上,也没有。”
这样知道之后,他应当自己这样策励自己:“你不是在母胎里,不是沉入水中,不是无想有情,不是死者,不是证得第四禅那的人,不是具足色界与无色界生存的人,不是证得灭尽定的人。你确实有入出息,只是因为智慧迟钝,才没办法把握到它们罢了。”
然后,他应当把心放在自然接触的地方,让作意运转起来。这些入出息,对鼻子长的人,是撞击鼻翼而运转的;对鼻子短的人,是撞击上唇的。因此,他应当确立“它们撞击这个位置”的相。世尊正是为了这个道理才说:“比丘们,我不说忘失念、不正知的人的入出息念修习。”
虽然任何一种业处都是具念、正知的人才能成就的,但如果作意于别的所缘,那个所缘就会变得明显。而这个入出息念业处,是沉重而难修的修行,只有佛陀、辟支佛、佛子这些大丈夫才能作意的境地;它不是短暂的,也不是下劣众生所亲近的。随着不断地作意,它就变得越来越寂静、越来越微细。因此,在这里,强而有力的念和慧是应当求得的。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo – tena bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi. Kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthī’’ti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhato ‘‘ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ matānaṃ catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ nirodhasamāpannāna’’nti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo ‘‘nanu, tvaṃ paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavasena cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsāpuṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti, rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992). Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati, ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānaṃyeva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
就像缝制细布的时候,需要细的针,而针孔又要比针更细;同样,修习这个像细布一样的业处时,需要像针一样的念,以及与念相应的、像针孔一样的慧,而且它们都要很强。具备这样的念和慧的比丘,不应该在自然接触的部位之外去寻找那些入出息。巴利
Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā, sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ, evamevaṃ maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
就像农夫耕完田以后,把公牛解开,让它们到有草的地方去,自己坐在树荫下休息。这时,那些公牛可能飞快地跑进森林。如果是个聪明的农夫,想再把它们抓住套上轭,他不会跟着牛的脚印到森林里到处找,而是拿起绳子和刺棒,直接走到它们常去饮水、沐浴的那个渡口,然后坐下或躺下。后来,那些牛游荡了大半天,来到渡口,沐浴、喝水,上岸站着。他看见以后,就用绳子把它们系住,用刺棒赶着,带回来套上轭,再让它们干活。同样,那位比丘不应该在自然触处之外去寻求入出息,而应该拿起念的绳子和慧的刺棒,在自然的触处安住心,让作意运转起来。他这样作意时,不久那些入出息就会现前,就像牛来到渡口一样。然后,他用念的绳子把它们系住,就在那个地方套好,用慧的刺棒不断鞭策,反复地精勤于业处。他这样精勤时,不久相就会现前。不过,这个相并非对所有人都相同。而且,有人说:对某些人,它产生乐触而现起时,像棉絮、像木棉絮、像气流一样。巴利
Yathā hi kassako khettaṃ kasitvā balībadde muñcitvā gocaramukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balībaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako, so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍati. Atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātanatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā. Atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātanatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti. Evamevaṃ tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evaṃ hissa manasikaroto na cirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti nipātanatitthe viya goṇā. Tato tena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena punappunaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ. Tassevamanuyuñjato na cirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti, apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya kappāsapicu viya vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
不过,在义注里是这样判定的:这个相,对有些人现起时像星星、像宝珠、像珍珠;对有些人现起时是粗糙的触感,像棉籽、像木髓针;对有些人现起时像长长的花绳、像花环、像烟柱;对有些人则广大地现起,像蜘蛛网、像云层、像莲花、像车轮、像月轮、像日轮。而且,就像许多比丘一起诵完经坐着,一个比丘问“这部经在你们那里现起成什么样”,一个人说“在我这里,它现起像一条巨大的山间河流”,另一个人说“在我这里,像一片树林”,又一个人说“在我这里,像一棵清凉、枝叶繁茂、果实累累的树”。同一部经,因为各人的想不同,就现起为不同的样子。同样,同一个业处,也因为想不同,就现起为不同的样子。要知道,这是想所生的、以想为因的、从想而起的,所以因为想不同,就现起为不同的样子。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāsu vinicchayo – idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya maṇiguḷikā viya muttāguḷikā viya ca, kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya dārusārasūci viya ca, kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya kusumadāmaṃ viya dhūmasikhā viya ca, kassaci vitthataṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya padumapupphaṃ viya rathacakkaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ viya sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti, tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ eko sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharito rukkho viyā’’ti. Tesañhi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāpabhavaṃ, tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
当这个相这样现起之后,那位比丘应当去老师那里报告说:“尊者,我现起了这样一种相。”老师则应当对他说:“贤友,这就是相。善士,你应当对这个业处反复作意。”然后,他应当把心只安住在那个相上。从这时起,他的修习就是这种以安住方式进行的修习。古人也确实这样说过:巴利
Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisā’’ti vattabbo. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
把心安住在相上,让各种行相清晰显现;
智者将自己的心系于入出息上。巴利
‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ; Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; visuddhi. 1.232);
从他这样现起相的那一刻开始,诸盖就被镇伏了,烦恼也平息了,心也通过近行定而达到等持。这时,他不应该从颜色方面去作意这个相,也不应该从特征方面去审察它,而应该像刹帝利大王后守护腹中的转轮王胎,又像农夫守护稻谷胎一样,避开住处等七种不适合的地方,只依止七种适合的地方,好好地守护它。这样守护之后,再再通过作意让它增长、壮大,成就十种安止善巧,并调匀精进。当他这样努力时,依照《清净道论》所说的次第,在这个相上生起四禅或五禅。这位已经生起四禅或五禅的比丘,为了达到清净,以观察和转向的方式增长业处,把那个禅那通过五种方式修到自在、熟练之后,确定名色,然后建立起观。怎么建立呢?他从定中出来以后,看见入出息、色身和心。就像铁匠的风箱鼓动时,风因为风箱、人以及相应的努力而流动;同样地,入出息也是依靠身体和心才产生的。然后他把入出息和身体确定为色,把心和与心相应的诸法确定为非色,也就是名。巴利
Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva, cittaṃ upacārasamādhinā samāhitameva. Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasi kātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ, apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca āvāsādīni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena sādhukaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, atha naṃ evaṃ rakkhitvā punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ, vīriyasamatā yojetabbā. Tassevaṃ ghaṭentassa visuddhimagge vuttānukkamena tasmiṃ nimitte catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattanti. Evaṃ nibbattacatukkapañcakajjhāno panettha bhikkhu sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati, evamevaṃ kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpanti, cittañca taṃsampayutte ca dhamme arūpanti vavatthapeti.
这样确定了名色之后,他去寻找名色的因缘。寻找时,他看到了那个因缘,于是对过去、未来、现在三时中名色的流转不再有疑惑。疑惑已经超越之后,他依照聚思惟的方式,把无常、苦、无我这三相安立起来。在生灭随观的前分阶段,他舍弃了光明等十种观随烦恼,得到远离随烦恼的生灭随观智,并把它确定为道。然后他舍弃生,到达坏随观。通过不间断地修习坏随观,当一切行法都以怖畏的样貌显现时,他厌离、离贪、解脱,就这样依次证得四圣道,安立于阿罗汉果,达到十九种省察智的究竟,成为包括天神在内的世间最上的应供者。到此为止,他的入出息念定修习,从计数开始,到观禅结束,就算圆满了。这是对第一个四法组从各方面所作的详细解释。巴利
Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati, pariyesanto ca taṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena bhayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa pariyantaṃ patto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti. Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā samattā hotīti. Ayaṃ sabbākārato paṭhamacatukkavaṇṇanā.
至于其余三个四法组,因为没有各自单独的业处修习方法,所以它们的含义只能按照逐句解释的方式来理解。觉知喜,就是清楚地觉知喜、让喜变得明显,同时这样修学:我应当觉知喜而入息,我应当觉知喜而出息。在这里,喜通过两种方式被觉知:通过所缘,以及通过不迷乱。巴利
Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi, tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva tesaṃ evamattho veditabbo. Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
喜怎样通过所缘而被觉知?他进入有喜的两种禅那,在他入定的那一刹那,由于证得禅那,喜就通过所缘而被觉知,因为所缘已被觉知。巴利
Kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā.
怎样才是以不迷乱的方式觉知?进入有喜的两种禅那,出定之后,观察与禅那相应的喜为灭尽、为坏灭。在观照的刹那,由于通达了特相,喜就以不迷乱的方式被觉知。按照同样的道理,其余各个词也应当根据其含义来理解。不过这里有一点差别:依三种禅那而觉知乐;依四种禅那而觉知心行。这里的心行,就是受蕴和想蕴。止息心行,是指把粗重的心行一次又一次地止息、灭尽,这就是它的意思。这应当依照前面解释身行的方法来详细理解。另外,在这里,喜这个词是以喜为代表来说受,乐这个词则是直接说受本身。在两个关于心行的表述中,依据想与受是心所法,这些法系属于心,所以称为心行这一说法,指的是与想相应的受。应当知道,这四法组是依照受随观的方式来解说的。巴利
Kathaṃ asammohato? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati, tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idaṃ panettha visesamattaṃ – tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sukhapaṭisaṃviditā hoti. Catunnampi jhānānaṃ vasena cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃviditā veditabbā. Cittasaṅkhāroti vedanāsaññākkhandhā. Passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayena veditabbo. Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā, sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā, ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti evaṃ vedanānupassanānayena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第三组四法里,也应当依照四种禅那来了知心的觉知。“令心欣喜”:令心欢喜、踊跃、喜悦、遍喜悦,他学:“我将入息,我将出息。”在这里,心的欣喜有两种方式:依于定,以及依于观。巴利
Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃviditā veditabbā. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
怎么依定来修?他进入带有喜的两种禅那,在入定的那一刻,用与定相应的喜让心欢喜、振奋。怎么依观来修?进入带有喜的两种禅那后出定,把与禅那相应的喜观为灭尽、坏灭。这样在观照的那一刻,以与禅那相应的喜作为所缘,让心欢喜、振奋。这样修行的人,就称为“学:我以欢喜吸气、呼气”。巴利
Kathaṃ samādhivasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, so samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
让心安定下来:这是指以初禅等方式,把心安放、安住在所缘上,让它保持平稳;或者,在进入那些禅那之后出定,观察与禅那相应的心是灭尽的、坏灭的,在观照的那个刹那,因为通达了特征而生起刹那的心一境性。依靠这种生起的刹那心一境性的力量,同样能把心安放、安住在所缘上,让它保持平稳。这样就被称为“学:我将让心安定地吸气、呼气”。巴利
Samādahaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento, tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sammasato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā, evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
“解脱心”:这是指,用初禅把心从诸盖中解脱出来、让心脱离诸盖;用第二禅把心从寻与伺中解脱出来;用第三禅把心从喜中解脱出来;用第四禅把心从苦与乐中解脱出来,如此让心脱离、令心解脱。或者,证入那些禅那之后出定,把与禅那相应的心作为灭尽、作为坏灭来观照。在观照的刹那,他以无常随观把心从常想中解脱出来、让心脱离常想;以苦随观把心从乐想中解脱出来;以无我随观把心从我想中解脱出来;以厌离随观把心从欢喜中解脱出来;以离贪随观把心从贪中解脱出来;以灭随观把心从集起中解脱出来;以弃舍随观把心从执取中解脱出来,一边这样让心脱离、令心解脱,一边吸气、呼气。因此说:“学:我将解脱心地吸气、呼气。”应当知道,这个四法组是依于心随观的理趣而说的。巴利
Vimocayaṃcittanti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuccati – ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ cittānupassanāvasena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第四组四法里,说到“无常随观者”时,首先应当了解什么是无常、什么是无常性、什么是无常随观、什么是无常随观者。其中,无常是指五蕴。为什么?因为它们有生起、坏灭和变易。无常性是指这五蕴本身的生起、坏灭和变易,或者说,存在之后又消失,意思是已经生起的事物无法保持那种状态,在刹那坏灭中消散。无常随观就是依那种无常性,对色等诸法观察“这是无常的”。无常随观者就是具足这种随观的人。因此应当知道,处于这种状态的人,在吸气、呼气时,就是“学:我将作为无常随观者而吸气,我将作为无常随观者而呼气”。巴利
Catutthacatukke pana aniccānupassīti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ, aniccatā veditabbā, aniccānupassanā veditabbā, aniccānupassī veditabbo. Tattha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. Aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ, hutvā abhāvo vā, nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. Aniccānupassanāti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassanā. Aniccānupassīti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato. Tasmā evaṃbhūto assasanto ca passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
对于“离贪随观者”这句话,这里有两种离贪:灭尽离贪和究竟离贪。其中,灭尽离贪是指诸行的刹那坏灭;究竟离贪是指涅槃。“离贪随观”就是依照见这两种而运作的观与道。应当知道,具足了这两种随观之后,在吸气、呼气时,就是“学:我将作为离贪随观者而吸气,我将作为离贪随观者而呼气”。对于“灭随观者”这个词,也是同样的道理。巴利
Virāgānupassīti ettha pana dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha khayavirāgoti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. Accantavirāgoti nibbānaṃ. Virāgānupassanāti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. Nirodhānupassīpadepi eseva nayo.
对于“舍遣随观”这个词,这里也有两种舍遣:遍舍弃遣和跃入舍遣。舍遣本身就是随观,所以叫“舍遣随观”,这是观和道的别名。观以彼分断的方式,连同诸蕴的造作一起舍断烦恼;又因为见到有为法的过患,心倾向于其反面的涅槃,所以既称为遍舍弃遣,也称为跃入舍遣。道以正断的方式,连同诸蕴的造作一起舍断烦恼;又以涅槃为所缘,所以既称为遍舍弃遣,也称为跃入舍遣。不过,这两种都因为随观之前那些智的不断随观,而称为“随观”。应当知道,具足了这两种舍遣随观之后,在吸气、呼气时,就是在学:我将作为舍遣随观者而吸气,我将作为舍遣随观者而呼气。巴利
Paṭinissaggānupassīti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā, vipassanāmaggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vipassanāti tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Maggo samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimañāṇānaṃ anuanu passanato anupassanāti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāyapi paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
在这里要明白:其中“无常随观”是就初阶的观来说的;“离贪随观”是就比前者更强、能在诸行上离染的观来说的;“灭随观”是就比前者更强、能灭除烦恼的观来说的;“舍遣随观”是就接近道、极为锐利的观来说的。不过,在能证得道的地方,那道本身并不是与观分离的。这样一来,这一组四法是纯粹就观本身来说的,而前面三组则是就止与观结合来说的。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘aniccānupassī’’ti taruṇavipassanāya vasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘virāgānupassī’’ti tato balavatarāya saṅkhāresu virajjanasamatthāya vipassanāya vasena, ‘‘nirodhānupassī’’ti tato balavatarāya kilesanirodhanasamatthāya vipassanāya vasena , ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī’’ti maggassa āsannabhūtāya atitikkhāya vipassanāya vasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yattha pana maggopi labbhati, so abhinnoyeva. Evamidaṃ catukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvasena vuttaṃ, purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasenāti.
164 164. 现在,为了把前面安立好的论母按顺序分开来显示,所以开始说“在此处”“对于这个见”等话。其中,通过“对于这个见”等十句,说的正是被称为三学的一切知佛陀的教法。这个教法因为是世尊佛陀所见,所以称为“见”;因为是世尊所能忍受的,所以称为“忍”;因为是好乐的,所以称为“乐”;因为是被执取的,所以称为“执受”;因为从自性上说,所以称为“法”;因为从应当学习的角度说,所以称为“律”;因为兼具这两者,所以称为“法与律”;因为是被宣说的,所以称为“圣典”;因为是最殊胜的修行,所以称为“梵行”;因为给予教导,所以称为“师教”。因此,在“对于这个见”等句中,应当理解为:对于这个佛陀的见,对于这个佛陀的忍,对于这个佛陀的乐,对于这个佛陀的执受,对于这个佛陀的法,对于这个佛陀的律,对于这个佛陀的法与律,对于这个佛陀的圣典,对于这个佛陀的梵行,对于这个佛陀的师教。再者,这个被称为三学的完整教法,因为被世尊所见、因为是正见的缘、因为以正见为先导,所以是“见”;因为世尊能忍受,所以是“忍”;因为好乐,所以是“乐”;因为执取,所以是“执受”;它能执持修行者不堕入恶趣,所以是“法”。它又能去除杂染方,所以是“律”。既是法又是律,所以是“法与律”;或者说,以善法去除不善法,这是“法与律”。因此这样说:“乔答弥,凡是你知道这些法导向离欲,不导向贪欲……乔答弥,你应当一向执持:这是法,这是律,这是师教。”或者说,以法而调伏,不是以杖等,所以是“法与律”。这也是所说的——巴利
164. Idāni yathānikkhittaṃ mātikaṃ paṭipāṭiyā bhājetvā dassetuṃ idhāti imissā diṭṭhiyātiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha imissā diṭṭhiyātiādīhi dasahi padehi sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sabbaññubuddhasāsanameva kathitaṃ. Tañhi buddhena bhagavatā diṭṭhattā diṭṭhīti vuccati, tasseva khamanavasena khanti, ruccanavasena ruci, gahaṇavasena ādāyo, sabhāvaṭṭhena dhammo, sikkhitabbaṭṭhena vinayo, tadubhayenapi dhammavinayo, pavuttavasena pāvacanaṃ, seṭṭhacariyaṭṭhena brahmacariyaṃ, anusiṭṭhidānavasena satthusāsananti vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘imissā diṭṭhiyā’’tiādīsu imissā buddhadiṭṭhiyā, imissā buddhakhantiyā, imissā buddharuciyā, imasmiṃ buddhaādāye, imasmiṃ buddhadhamme, imasmiṃ buddhavinaye, imasmiṃ buddhadhammavinaye, imasmiṃ buddhapāvacane, imasmiṃ buddhabrahmacariye, imasmiṃ buddhasatthusāsaneti attho veditabbo. Apicetaṃ sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sakalaṃ pāvacanaṃ bhagavatā diṭṭhattā sammādiṭṭhipaccayattā sammādiṭṭhipubbaṅgamattā ca diṭṭhi. Bhagavato khamanavasena khanti. Ruccanavasena ruci. Gahaṇavasena ādāyo . Attano kārakaṃ apāye apatamānaṃ dhāretīti dhammo. Sova saṃkilesapakkhaṃ vinetīti vinayo. Dhammo ca so vinayo cāti dhammavinayo, kusaladhammehi vā akusaladhammānaṃ esa vinayoti dhammavinayo. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti, no sarāgāya…pe… ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi eso dhammo eso vinayo etaṃ satthusāsana’’nti (a. ni. 8.53; cūḷava. 406). Dhammena vā vinayo, na daṇḍādīhīti dhammavinayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
有人用棍棒来调伏,也用钩子和鞭子;
那位大仙不用棍棒、不用刀剑,就调伏了这头龙象。巴利
‘‘Daṇḍeneke damayanti, aṅkusehi kasāhi ca; Adaṇḍena asatthena, nāgo danto mahesinā’’ti. (ma. ni. 2.352; cūḷava. 342);
同样地,“以法引导的人,有智慧的人怎么会有嫉妒呢?”(大品63)。或者,法是法,律是律,合起来就是“法与律”。因为这个律是为了无过失的法义,不是为了生存、财富和利养。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,这梵行不是为了欺骗世人的。”(如是语35;增支部4.25)广说。富楼那长老也说:“贤友,在世尊这里修梵行,是为了无取著般涅槃。”(中部1.259)。或者,因为它引导到清净,所以叫“律”;从法而言是律,所以叫“法与律”。因为它引导众生从轮回之法或从忧愁等法中到达清净的涅槃;或者,它是法的律,不是外道师们所制的,所以叫“法与律”。因为世尊就是法的体现,这个律正是属于他的。又因为只有诸法才是应当证知、应当遍知、应当断除、应当修习、应当作证的,所以这个律是就诸法而说的,不是就众生、不是就命者而说的,因此叫“法与律”。因为具有义理和文句等,胜过其他的言说,所以叫“圣教”;圣教本身就是“圣典”。在一切修行中是最殊胜的修行,所以叫“梵行”。因为是天人师世尊的教法,所以叫“师教”;或者,以教法为大师,也叫“师教”。正如(长部2.216)所说:“阿难,我为你们所宣说、所制定的法与律,在我入灭后,就是你们的大师。”所以法与律本身就是大师。应当这样理解这些词的含义。又因为只有在这教法中,才有能修成一切种类的入出息念定的比丘,不在别处,所以应当在各处了知“在此”或“于此”这个限定。这就是“在此”这一总说之解释的含义。巴利
Tathā ‘‘dhammena nayamānānaṃ, kā usūyā vijānata’’nti (mahāva. 63). Dhammāya vā vinayo dhammavinayo. Anavajjadhammatthaṃ hesa vinayo, na bhavabhogāmisatthaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘nayidaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyaṃ vussati janakuhanattha’’nti (itivu. 35; a. ni. 4.25) vitthāro. Puṇṇattheropi āha – ‘‘anupādāparinibbānatthaṃ kho, āvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.259). Visuddhaṃ vā nayatīti vinayo, dhammato vinayo dhammavinayo. Saṃsāradhammato hi sokādidhammato vā esa visuddhaṃ nibbānaṃ nayati, dhammassa vā vinayo, na titthakarānanti dhammavinayo. Dhammabhūto hi bhagavā, tasseva esa vinayo. Yasmā vā dhammā eva abhiññeyyā pariññeyyā pahātabbā bhāvetabbā sacchikātabbā ca, tasmā esa dhammesu vinayo, na sattesu na jīvesu cāti dhammavinayo. Sātthasabyañjanatādīhi aññesaṃ vacanato padhānaṃ vacananti pavacanaṃ, pavacanameva pāvacanaṃ. Sabbacariyāhi visiṭṭhacariyabhāvena brahmacariyaṃ. Devamanussānaṃ satthubhūtassa bhagavato sāsananti satthusāsanaṃ, satthubhūtaṃ vā sāsanantipi satthusāsanaṃ. ‘‘Yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) hi dhammavinayova satthāti vutto. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Yasmā pana imasmiṃyeva sāsane sabbākāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattako bhikkhu vijjati, na aññatra, tasmā tattha tattha ‘‘imissā’’ti ca ‘‘imasmi’’nti ca ayaṃ niyamo katoti veditabbo. Ayaṃ ‘‘idhā’’timātikāya niddesassa attho.
这里没有通过“凡夫善士”等说法来解释“比丘”这个词的含义,而是直接指出这里所说的比丘本人。其中,因为烦恼还没有断除,所以他是凡夫;因为具备戒等修行,所以他是善士,因此叫凡夫善士。凡夫善士本身就是凡夫善士(puthujjanakalyāṇako)。因为修学增上戒等,所以叫有学,也就是入流者、一来者或不来者。不动法就是拥有不可动摇、无法被撼动的阿拉汉果法。他也在修习这个定。巴利
Puthujjanakalyāṇakovātiādinā ca bhikkhusaddassa vacanatthaṃ avatvā idhādhippetabhikkhuyeva dassito. Tattha puthujjano ca so kilesānaṃ asamucchinnattā, kalyāṇo ca sīlādipaṭipattiyuttattāti puthujjanakalyāṇo, puthujjanakalyāṇova puthujjanakalyāṇako. Adhisīlādīni sikkhatīti sekkho. Sotāpanno vā sakadāgāmī vā anāgāmī vā. Akuppo calayitumasakkuṇeyyo arahattaphaladhammo assāti akuppadhammo. Sopi hi imaṃ samādhiṃ bhāveti.
在解释“阿兰若”时,先按律藏的教说方式,引用了“除了村庄和村庄的近郊之外,剩下的就是阿兰若”(波罗夷 92)。按经藏的教说方式,则是针对住在阿兰若的比丘,引用了“所谓阿兰若坐卧处,至少为五百弓”(波逸提 573)。不过,律藏和经藏这两种教说都属于施设教说,阿毗达摩才是非施设教说。为了按阿毗达摩的方式说明阿兰若,就说“走出到门槛外”,意思是从门槛走出到外面。也有“走出到门槛外”这样的读法,说的是越过门槛到了外面。这里说的“门槛”,是指村庄或城镇的门槛。巴利
Araññaniddese vinayapariyāyena tāva ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ arañña’’nti (pārā. 92) āgataṃ. Suttantapariyāyena āraññakaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pāci. 573) āgataṃ. Vinayasuttantā pana ubhopi pariyāyadesanā nāma, abhidhammo nippariyāyadesanāti abhidhammapariyāyena (vibha. 529) araññaṃ dassetuṃ nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlāti vuttaṃ, indakhīlato bahi nikkhamitvāti attho. Nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlantipi pāṭho, indakhīlaṃ atikkamitvā bahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Indakhīloti cettha gāmassa vā nagarassa vā ummāro.
在解释“树下”时,因为“树下”本身已经很清楚,所以没有直接说“树下”,而是用了“在哪里”等说法。其中,“在哪里”就是指在哪一棵树根下。“坐处”,是说人们坐在那里,所以叫坐处。“铺设”,指已经安置好的。“床”等等,是坐处的不同分类名称。因为床也可以用来坐,所以这里也把它归在坐处里。这种床,是框架床、结绑床、蟹脚床、插脚床当中的一种。凳子,也只是这些坐具中的一种。“垫子”,是毛垫、布垫、树皮垫、草垫、叶垫当中的一种。“草席”,是用棕榈叶等编成的。“皮片”,指任何适合坐的皮块。“草铺”等,是用草等捆扎铺成的东西。“在那里”,就是在那棵树根下。“或经行”等说法,说明树根下适合四种威仪活动。通过“在哪里”等所有这些词,也说明了树根下有浓密的树荫,而且远离人群。“以某某群”,就是被某一群人。把这一群人拆开来说明:或是在家人,或是出家人。“不拥挤”,指不混杂、不逼窄。如果某个坐卧处周围一拘卢舍或半由旬内有山险、密林、河流等难以通行的地方,没有人能在不合适的时候靠近,那么即使离得很近,这也叫“不拥挤”。但如果只是半由旬或一由旬远,那只是因为距离远,才叫“不拥挤”。巴利
Rukkhamūlaniddese rukkhamūlassa pākaṭattā taṃ avatvāva yatthātiādimāha. Tattha yatthāti yasmiṃ rukkhamūle. Āsanti nisīdanti etthāti āsanaṃ. Paññattanti ṭhapitaṃ. Mañco vātiādīni āsanassa pabhedavacanāni. Mañcopi hi nisajjāyapi okāsattā idha āsanesu vutto. So pana masārakabundikābaddhakuḷīrapādakaāhaccapādakānaṃ aññataro. Pīṭhaṃ tesaṃ aññatarameva. Bhisīti uṇṇābhisicoḷabhisivākabhisitiṇabhisipaṇṇabhisīnaṃ aññatarā. Taṭṭikāti tālapaṇṇādīhi cinitvā katā. Cammakhaṇḍoti nisajjāraho yo koci cammakhaṇḍo. Tiṇasantharādayo tiṇādīni gumbetvā katā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ rukkhamūle. Caṅkamati vātiādīhi rukkhamūlassa catuiriyāpathapavattanayogyatā kathitā. ‘‘Yatthā’’tiādīhi sabbapadehi rukkhamūlassa sandacchāyatā janavivittatā ca vuttā hoti. Kenacīti kenaci samūhena. Taṃ samūhaṃ bhinditvā vitthārento gahaṭṭhehi vā pabbajitehi vāti āha. Anākiṇṇanti asaṃkiṇṇaṃ asambādhaṃ. Yassa senāsanassa samantā gāvutampi aḍḍhayojanampi pabbatagahanaṃ vanagahanaṃ nadīgahanaṃ hoti, na koci avelāya upasaṅkamituṃ sakkoti, idaṃ santikepi anākiṇṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana aḍḍhayojanikaṃ vā yojanikaṃ vā hoti, idaṃ dūratāya eva anākiṇṇaṃ nāma.
所谓“住处”,是指除了半覆屋等以外的其他住所。“半覆屋”,就是像金翅鸟翅膀那样弯曲的房屋。“重阁”,是取两重屋檐建成的长形楼阁。“楼阁”,就是建在上方天空处的尖顶楼阁。“洞穴”,《犍度注》里说有砖洞、石洞、木洞、土洞。但在《分别注》里,“住处”是指四周有巡行步道、里面有夜间住处和日间住处、并且已经铺设好坐卧具的地方。“洞穴”是指地洞,在那里昼夜都能得到灯火。或者,这里是特别区分出山洞和地洞这两种来说的。在论母中,为了总括一切时处、以共通的特征来表达,所以用了现在时的“他坐下”;但在这里,因为对已经坐下的人来说,有开始修行的实际情况,为了显示从坐下开始到结束的过程,所以用了完成时的“已坐”。又因为端直身体而坐的人,身体是正直的,所以不执着于字面上的表达,只为了显示所要表达的意思,就说了“正直”等话。其中,“已令端正而住”,是因为有意保持端正,所以令身体正直而住,并不是自然而然就变成那样。“执持所缘”,就是被执持的状态。执持了什么?出离。什么是出离?就是入出息念定,乃至阿拉汉道。因此,就“出离之处”这个词最主要的意义来说,所表达的是从轮回中出离之处。“现起之处”,就是本性之处。用这所有的词句,意思就是:执持出离并作意于念。有些论师则解释说:“‘执持之处’是指念的执持之处,‘出离之处’是指入出息入出之门户之处。”这里所说的就是:现起执持入出息出离之念。巴利
Vihāroti aḍḍhayogādimuttako avasesāvāso. Aḍḍhayogoti supaṇṇavaṅkagehaṃ. Pāsādoti dve kaṇṇikā gahetvā kato dīghapāsādo. Hammiyanti upariākāsatale patiṭṭhitakūṭāgārapāsādoyeva. Guhāti iṭṭhakāguhā silāguhā dāruguhā paṃsuguhāti evañhi khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 294) vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vihāroti samantā parihārapathaṃ antoyeva rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni ca dassetvā katasenāsanaṃ. Guhāti bhūmiguhā, yattha rattindivaṃ dīpaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭati. Pabbataguhā vā bhūmiguhā vāti idaṃ dvayaṃ visesetvā vuttaṃ. Mātikāya sabbakālasādhāraṇalakkhaṇavasena ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti vattamānavacanaṃ kataṃ, idha pana nisinnassa bhāvanārambhasabbhāvato nisajjārambhapariyosānadassanatthaṃ nisinnoti niṭṭhānavacanaṃ kataṃ. Yasmā pana ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya nisinnassa kāyo ujuko hoti, tasmā byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā adhippetama eva dassento ujukotiādimāha. Tattha ṭhito supaṇihitoti ujukaṃ paṇihitattā ujuko hutvā ṭhito, na sayamevāti attho. Pariggahaṭṭhoti pariggahitaṭṭho. Kiṃ pariggahitaṃ? Niyyānaṃ. Kiṃ niyyānaṃ? Ānāpānassatisamādhiyeva yāva arahattamaggā niyyānaṃ. Tenāhaniyyānaṭṭhoti mukhasaddassa jeṭṭhakatthavasena saṃsārato niyyānaṭṭho vutto. Upaṭṭhānaṭṭhoti sabhāvaṭṭhoyeva. Sabbehi panetehi padehi pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvāti attho vutto hoti. Keci pana ‘‘pariggahaṭṭhoti satiyā pariggahaṭṭho, niyyānaṭṭhoti assāsapassāsānaṃ pavisananikkhamanadvāraṭṭho’’ti vaṇṇayanti. Pariggahitaassāsapassāsaniyyānaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
165 “以三十二种行相”这句话,是针对那些在不同阶段中依次获得的(禅支等法),以无余穷尽的方式来说的。“依长入息”是指依论母中所说的“长”的入息。其余各项也是如此。“一境性”就是心专一的状态。“不散乱”就是不散开。因为心对种种所缘不散开,所以一境性本身就被称为不散乱。“了知”是指以不迷乱的方式了知,或者说是体验的意思;也可以理解为以“我获得了不散乱”这样的所缘作用来了知。“以那念”是指以那已现起的念。“以那智”是指以那了知不散乱的智。“成为念而作者”在这里,因为只有与智相应的念才被认定为此处所说的“念”,正如经中所说:“具念,具足最上念与审慎。”所以仅凭“念”这个词,智也已经被包含在内了。巴利
165.Bāttiṃsāya ākārehīti tāsu tāsu avatthāsu yathākkamena labbhamānānaṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena vuttaṃ. Dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti mātikāya ‘‘dīgha’’ntivuttaassāsavasena. Evaṃ sesesu. Ekaggatanti ekaggabhāvaṃ. Avikkhepanti avikkhipanaṃ. Ekaggatā eva hi nānārammaṇesu cittassa avikkhipanato avikkhepoti vuccati. Pajānatoti asammohavasena pajānantassa, vindantassāti vā attho. ‘‘Avikkhepo me paṭiladdho’’ti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pajānantassa vā. Tāya satiyāti tāya upaṭṭhitāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti tena avikkhepajānanañāṇena. Sato kārī hotīti ettha yasmā ñāṇasampayuttā eva sati satīti adhippetā, yathāha – ‘‘satimā hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 467). Tasmā ‘‘sato’’ti vacaneneva ñāṇampi gahitameva hoti.
166 “长时间”是指漫长的时间。因为长路被称为“长时间”,而这里的时间也因为漫长,所以像长路一样被称为“长时间”。虽然分别说了“入息”和“出息”,但为了显示修行持续不断地进行,又把它们合起来说“入息也出息”。欲生起:随着修行增长、进一步加深,欲就生起了。更微细:这是就止息的状态而说的。欢悦生起:因为修行圆满,喜就生起了。心也从入出息转出:当依入出息生起似相时,心就从自然的入出息中退回。舍安住:对于那个似相,由于再次入定时没有加行功用,依近行定和安止定而得的舍安住,称为舍。九种行相:这里,从修行开始直到欲生起之前所说的“入息也出息”三种行相,从欲生起直到欢悦生起之前的三种,从欢悦生起之后的三种,共九种行相。身:即使入出息碎为微尘,以聚集义为身。依自然的入息和出息所生起的似相,也获得入出息之名。现起为念:念取彼所缘而安住,故称为现起。随观之智:以止的方面是似相的身随观,以观的方面是名身和色身的随观之智,这是意思。身为现起:那个身取彼而安住,于此有念,故称为现起。非念:那个身不是念,这是意思。以那个念:以现在所说的念。以那个智:以现在所说的智。随观那个身:以止观的方式随逐所说的身,以与禅相应的智或以观智而见。巴利
166.Addhānasaṅkhāteti dīghasaṅkhāte kāle. Dīgho hi maggo addhānoti vuccati. Ayampi kālo dīghattā addhāno viya addhānoti vutto. ‘‘Assasatī’’ti ca ‘‘passasatī’’ti ca assāsañca passāsañca visuṃ visuṃ vatvāpi bhāvanāya nirantarappavattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘assasatipi passasatipī’’ti puna samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Chando uppajjatīti bhāvanābhivuddhiyā bhiyyobhāvāya chando jāyati. Sukhumataranti passambhanasabbhāvato vuttaṃ. Pāmojjaṃ uppajjatīti bhāvanāpāripūriyā pīti jāyati. Assāsapassāsāpi cittaṃ vivattatīti assāsapassāse nissāya paṭibhāganimitte uppajjante pakatiassāsapassāsato cittaṃ nivattati. Upekkhā saṇṭhātīti tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte upacārappanāsamādhipattiyā puna samādhāne byāpārābhāvato tatramajjhattupekkhā saṇṭhāti nāma. Navahākārehīti ettha bhāvanārambhato pabhuti pure chanduppādā ‘‘assasatipi passasatipī’’ti vuttā tayo ākārā, chanduppādato pabhuti pure pāmojjuppādā tayo, pāmojjuppādato pabhuti tayoti nava ākārā. Kāyoti cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā samūhaṭṭhena kāyo. Pakatiassāsapakatipassāse nissāya uppannanimittampi assāsapassāsāti nāmaṃ labhati. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ upecca tiṭṭhatīti sati upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Anupassanā ñāṇanti samathavasena nimittakāyānupassanā, vipassanāvasena nāmakāyarūpakāyānupassanā ñāṇanti attho. Kāyo upaṭṭhānanti so kāyo upecca tiṭṭhati ettha satīti upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. No satīti so kāyo sati nāma na hotīti attho. Tāya satiyāti idāni vuttāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti idāneva vuttena ñāṇena. Taṃ kāyaṃ anupassatīti samathavipassanāvasena yathāvuttaṃ kāyaṃ anugantvā jhānasampayuttañāṇena vā vipassanāñāṇena vā passati.
在论母里虽然没有“身”等词,但因为这一组四法(身、受、心、法)是就身随观的方式来说的,所以现在为了指向接下来要说的“于身之身随观念处修习”这句话,就先对“身”这个词作了解释。“于身随观身”,就是在种种不同的身中,对每一种身作随观。或者说,于身随观身,不是随观其他法。对于这个无常、苦、无我、不净的身,不随观为常、乐、我、净,而是随观这个身确实是无常、苦、无我、不净的。或者说,对于这个身,不随观任何可以被执取为“我”“我所”“女人”“男人”的东西,而只是随观这个纯粹的身本身。后面在受等(受随观受等)三处中,道理也是这样。念本身就是现起,所以叫念处;与身随观相应的念处,就是身随观念处;它的修习,就是身随观念处修习。巴利
Mātikāya kāyādīnaṃ padānaṃ abhāvepi imassa catukkassa kāyānupassanāvasena vuttattā idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāya kāyapadaniddeso kato. Kāye kāyānupassanāti bahuvidhe kāye tassa tassa kāyassa anupassanā. Atha vā kāye kāyānupassanā, na aññadhammānupassanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhūte kāye na niccasukhattasubhānupassanā, atha kho aniccadukkhānattāsubhato kāyasseva anupassanā. Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā itthīti vā purisoti vā gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato tasseva kāyamattassa anupassanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upari vedanāsu vedanānupassanātiādīsu tīsupi eseva nayo. Satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, kāyānupassanāya sampayuttaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā.
167 167. 「彼身」:即使没有明确指出名色身,因为“身”这个词也涵盖了它,所以就像已经明确指出一样说了。因为无常随观等,只有在名色身上才能获得,不是在相身上。随观和修习,意思已经说过了。「依长入出息等」:这是为了显示入出息念修习的利益而说的。它的利益就是念的圆满和智的圆满。其中,「了知心一境性、无散乱」:这是指已获得禅那的人,在观的时候了知心一境性。「受已知」:是指以总相见生起而了知受。「受已知而现起」:是指以灭、坏灭、空而了知受现起。「受已知而消失」:是指以总相见灭,了知受走向坏灭、消散,也就是坏灭的意思。想和寻也是同样的道理。不过,说了这三者的时候,其余色法其实也已经说了。为什么只说这三者呢?因为难以把握。在受当中,苦受和乐受是明显的,但舍受微细、难以把握,不太明显。不过对这个人来说,它也变得明显了。想因为只取行相,不取实相,当它和能取实相与共相的观智相应时,显得极其不明显。不过对这个人来说,它也变得明显了。寻因为像智,难以和智区分开来,所以难以把握。寻确实像智。正如所说:「贤友毗舍佉,正见和正思惟,这些法归入慧蕴。」对这个人来说,那个寻也变得明显了。这样,说了难以把握的(三者)之后,其余的也就等于已经说了。不过,在解释这些词的时候,问「了知受如何生起」而不回答那个问题,只回答了了知受的生起,就等于回答了了知受。因此说「如何了知受的生起」等等。其余的也是同样的道理。「无明集则……无明灭则……」等,意思和前面说的一样。以同样的方式,想和寻也应该理解。不过在寻的部分,没有说「触集则……触灭则……」,而是在触的位置说了「想集则……想灭则……」。那是为什么呢?因为寻以想为根本。因为说过:「由于想的差别,生起思惟的差别。」巴利
167. Taṃ kāyanti aniddiṭṭhepi nāmarūpakāye kāyasaddena tassāpi saṅgahitattā niddiṭṭhaṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ. Aniccānupassanādayo hi nāmarūpakāye eva labbhanti, na nimittakāye. Anupassanā ca bhāvanā ca vuttatthā eva. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsavasenātiādi ānāpānassatibhāvanāya ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tassā hi sativepullatāñāṇavepullatā ca ānisaṃso. Tattha cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānatoti paṭiladdhajjhānassa vipassanākāle cittekaggataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Viditā vedanāti sāmaññato udayadassanena viditā vedanā. Viditā upaṭṭhahantīti khayato vayato suññato viditā upaṭṭhahanti. Viditā abbhatthaṃ gacchantīti sāmaññato vayadassanena viditā vināsaṃ gacchanti, bhijjantīti attho. Saññāvitakkesupi eseva nayo. Imesu pana tīsu vuttesu sesā rūpadhammāpi vuttā honti. Kasmā pana ime tayo eva vuttāti ce? Duppariggahattā. Vedanāsu tāva sukhadukkhā pākaṭā, upekkhā pana sukhumā duppariggahā, na suṭṭhu pākaṭā. Sāpi cassa pākaṭā hoti, saññā ākāramattaggāhakattā na yathāsabhāvaggāhinī . Sā ca sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇaggāhakena vipassanāñāṇena sampayuttā ati viya apākaṭā. Sāpi cassa pākaṭā hoti, vitakko ñāṇapatirūpakattā ñāṇato visuṃ katvā duppariggaho. Ñāṇapatirūpako hi vitakko. Yathāha – ‘‘yā cāvuso visākha, sammādiṭṭhi yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462). Sopi cassa vitakko pākaṭo hotīti evaṃ duppariggahesu vuttesu sesā vuttāva hontīti. Imesaṃ pana padānaṃ niddese kathaṃ viditā vedanā uppajjantīti pucchitvā taṃ avissajjetvāva vedanuppādassa viditatteyeva vissajjite vedanāya viditattaṃ vissajjitaṃ hotīti kathaṃ vedanāya uppādo vidito hotītiādimāha. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Avijjāsamudayā avijjānirodhātiādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthā eva. Imināva nayena saññāvitakkāpi veditabbā. Vitakkavāre pana ‘‘phassasamudayā phassanirodhā’’ti avatvā phassaṭṭhāne saññāsamudayā saññānirodhāti vuttaṃ. Taṃ kasmā iti ce? Saññāmūlakattā vitakkassa. ‘‘Saññānānattaṃ paṭicca uppajjati saṅkappanānatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.359) hi vuttaṃ.
在“以无常作意”等句里,应该按照“以无常作意于受”这样的方式,在每一个对应的环节配上相应的法。不过,和观相应的受,因为不能执行观的作用,对观没有帮助,所以没有列入菩提分法。和观相应的想,它的作用更不明显,所以对观完全没有帮助。但如果没有寻,观的作用就根本不存在。因为观要依靠寻作为伙伴,才能完成自己的作用。正如所说的:巴利
Aniccato manasikarototiādīsu ca ‘‘vedanaṃ aniccato manasikaroto’’tiādinā nayena tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vāre so soyeva dhammo yojetabbo. Yasmā pana vipassanāsampayuttā vedanā vipassanākiccakaraṇe asamatthattā vipassanāya anupakārikā, tasmāyeva ca bodhipakkhiyadhammesu nāgatā. Vipassanāsampayuttāya pana saññāya kiccameva aparibyattaṃ, tasmā sā vipassanāya ekantamanupakārikā eva. Vitakkaṃ pana vinā vipassanākiccameva natthi. Vitakkasahāyā hi vipassanā sakakiccaṃ karoti. Yathāha –
慧不能靠自身的法性把所缘判定为无常、苦、无我,但依靠寻反复敲击、递送时,就能做到。怎么做到呢?就像金匠把一枚金币放在手里,虽然想看清它的所有部分,却不能只靠转动眼珠就做到,而是要用手指节反复翻动,才能从这边那边都看清楚。同样,慧不能靠自身的法性以无常等方式判定所缘,但依靠具有安立相、以敲击和遍敲为作用的寻,像敲击、像翻动那样,不断取来递去,才能判定。巴利
‘‘Paññā attano dhammatāya aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ na sakkoti, vitakke pana ākoṭetvā ākoṭetvā dente sakkoti. Kathaṃ? Yathā hi heraññiko kahāpaṇaṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā sabbabhāgesu oloketukāmo samānopi na cakkhutaleneva parivattetuṃ sakkoti, aṅgulipabbehi pana parivattetvā parivattetvā ito cito ca oloketuṃ sakkoti, evameva na paññā attano dhammatāya aniccādivasena ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ sakkoti, abhiniropanalakkhaṇena pana āhananapariyāhananarasena vitakkena ākoṭentena viya parivattentena viya ca ādāyādāya dinnameva nicchetuṃ sakkotī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.568).
所以,因为受和想对观(vipassanā)没有帮助,为了只从它们各自的特相来显示,才在每一处用单数形式说“受”“想”。而为了显示观有多少种分别,寻就有多少种分别,所以在每一处用复数形式说“诸寻”,这样说才合适。巴利
Tasmā vedanāsaññānaṃ vipassanāya anupakārattā lakkhaṇamattavaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘vedanāya saññāyā’’ti tattha tattha ekavacanena niddeso kato. Yattako pana vipassanāya bhedo, tattako eva vitakkassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘vitakkāna’’nti tattha tattha bahuvacanena niddeso katoti vattuṃ yujjati.
168 168. 再者,“依长入出息”等语,是为了显示入出息念修行的成就和修行之果而说的。其中,“结合”是指安住所缘,或者令所缘确立。即使没有结合的加行作用,仅因修行圆满,也称为“结合”。“行境”:在观刹那,以诸行为所缘;在道刹那和果刹那,以涅槃为所缘。“等义”:就是“等”本身的意义,或者以“等”为目的,所以叫“等义”。此即“等义”所指,其余各处也是如此。“结合道”:指在道与果的刹那,行境唯有涅槃。“这位人”:即精勤于入出息念修行的瑜伽行者。“于此所缘”:这里,所缘是由“身”一词所摄的、称为名色身的有为所缘,以及依次在道中的涅槃所缘。“彼之”等语句,说明所缘与行境等词是同一意义。“彼”:指那位人。“了知”:即“人”“了知”“慧”之义,意为那人以慧了知。“所缘的现起”:在观刹那,是诸行所缘的现起;在道与果刹那,是涅槃所缘的现起,此现起即是念。在此,是依所缘义用属格,如说“国王的现起”。“不散乱”即定。“决断”:即如前所说的诸行所缘与涅槃所缘,因为心于此决断,所以叫“决断”。“清净”即智,因为心由此而得清净、净化,所以叫清净。倾向于昏沉的定,因达到不昏沉的状态而平等,故为“等”;倾向于掉举的智,因达到不掉举的状态而平等,故为“等”。由此,在观、道、果的刹那,止与观双运相应之说便得以成立。而念因遍一切处,故能资助此二者之平等,所以是“等”;所缘因平等决断,所以是“等”。“无过失义”:即观的無过失自性。“离杂染义”:即道的离杂染自性。或者读作“离杂染义”。“清净义”:即果的纯净自性。“最上义”:即涅槃的一切法中最胜自性。“通达”:即以无痴如实通达彼彼自性。在此,由“所缘的现起”等语,说明了正通达。也正因为在此已说了清净义的通达,所以以彼同一相,无过失义、离杂染义、最上义也就依相摄法门而说。正如所说——巴利
168. Puna dīghaṃ assāsapassāsavasenātiādi ānāpānassatibhāvanāya sampattiṃ bhāvanāphalañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha samodhānetīti ārammaṇaṃ ṭhapeti, ārammaṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpetīti vā attho. Samodahanabyāpārābhāvepi bhāvanāpāripūriyā eva samodahati nāma. Gocaranti vipassanākkhaṇe saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ, maggakkhaṇe phalakkhaṇe ca nibbānārammaṇaṃ. Samatthanti samameva attho, samassa vā atthoti samattho. Taṃ samatthaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Maggaṃ samodhānetīti maggaphalakkhaṇeyeva gocaraṃ nibbānameva. Ayaṃ puggaloti ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ anuyutto yogāvacarova. Imasmiṃ ārammaṇeti ettha pana ‘‘kāye’’tipadena saṅgahite nāmarūpakāyasaṅkhāte saṅkhatārammaṇe teneva kamena magge nibbānārammaṇe ca. Yaṃ tassātiādīhi ārammaṇagocarasaddānaṃ ekatthatā vuttā. Tassāti tassa puggalassa. Pajānātīti puggalo pajānanā paññāti puggalo paññāya pajānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇassa upaṭṭhānanti vipassanākkhaṇe saṅkhārārammaṇassa, maggaphalakkhaṇe nibbānārammaṇassa upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Ettha ca kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ yathā rañño upaṭṭhānanti. Avikkhepoti samādhi. Adhiṭṭhānanti yathāvuttasaṅkhārārammaṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇañca . Tañhi adhiṭṭhāti ettha cittanti adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vodānanti ñāṇaṃ. Tañhi vodāyati visujjhati tena cittanti vodānaṃ. Līnapakkhiko samādhi alīnabhāvappattiyā samabhūtattā samaṃ, uddhaccapakkhikaṃ ñāṇaṃ anuddhatabhāvappattiyā samabhūtattā samaṃ. Tena vipassanāmaggaphalakkhaṇesu samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhatā vuttā hoti. Sati pana sabbatthikattā tadubhayasamatāya upakārikāti samaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ samatādhiṭṭhānattā samaṃ. Anavajjaṭṭhoti vipassanāya anavajjasabhāvo. Niklesaṭṭhoti maggassa nikkilesasabhāvo. Nikkilesaṭṭhoti vā pāṭho. Vodānaṭṭhoti phalassa parisuddhasabhāvo. Paramaṭṭhoti nibbānassa sabbadhammuttamasabhāvo. Paṭivijjhatīti taṃ taṃ sabhāvaṃ asammohato paṭivijjhati. Ettha ca ‘‘ārammaṇassa upaṭṭhāna’’ntiādīhi sammā paṭivedho vutto. Ettheva ca vodānaṭṭhapaṭivedhassa vuttattā tena ekalakkhaṇā anavajjaṭṭhanikkilesaṭṭhaparamaṭṭhā lakkhaṇahāravasena vuttāyeva honti. Yathāha –
当说到一法时,凡是有同一特质的任何法
所有这些都已被宣说,因此这种摄理就叫做“相”。巴利
‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci; Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā’’ti. (netti. 4.5 niddesavāra);
在这里,“无过失之义”和“离杂染之义”,指的是被称为“不散乱”的“平等”的意义和目的,所以是“等义”;“清净之义”,就观的清净和道的清净来说,正是“平等”本身的意义,所以是“等义”;就果的清净来说,是指被称为道清净的“平等”的意义,所以是“等义”;而“最上之义”,要么就是“平等”本身的意义,要么因为一切“平等”都以涅槃为目的,所以是“等”的意义,因此是“等义”。把上面所说的“平等”和“等义”,去掉重复的部分、保留其余的部分,合起来说为“通达等义”。根、力、觉支这些法,在观、道、果的刹那也能获得;道和三种清净,只在道和果的刹那;解脱、明和尽智,只在道的刹那;解脱和无生智,只在果的刹那;其余的法,在观的刹那也有。在法品中,“将这些法结合于此所缘”:除了涅槃以外,其余的法应按照各自相应的情况来了知。不过这是就大多数情况来说的。这里没有说到的含义,前面已经说过了。在这里,虽然按照每一组四法来显示出离,但因为每一组中所包含的每一个部分都是出离的强有力助缘,所以也按照每一个部分来显示出离。因为如果没有每一个部分,就不会有出离。巴利
Anavajjaṭṭho nikkilesaṭṭho cettha avikkhepasaṅkhātassa samassa attho payojananti samattho, vodānaṭṭho vipassanāmaggavodānaṃ sandhāya samameva atthoti samattho, phalavodānaṃ sandhāya maggavodānasaṅkhātassa samassa atthoti samattho, paramaṭṭho pana samameva atthoti vā nibbānapayojanattā sabbassa samassa atthoti vā samattho, taṃ vuttappakāraṃ samañca samatthañca ekadesasarūpekasesaṃ katvā samatthañca paṭivijjhatīti vuttaṃ. Indriyabalabojjhaṅgadhammā vipassanāmaggaphalakkhaṇepi labbhanti, maggo ca tisso ca visuddhiyo maggaphalakkhaṇeyeva, vimokkho ca vijjā ca khaye ñāṇañca maggakkhaṇeyeva, vimutti ca anuppāde ñāṇañca phalakkhaṇeyeva, sesā vipassanākkhaṇepīti. Dhammavāre ime dhamme imasmiṃ ārammaṇe samodhānetīti nibbānaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā yathāyogaṃ veditabbā. Idaṃ pana yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Avuttatthā panettha heṭṭhā vuttā eva. Ekekacatukkavasenettha niyyāne dassitepi catukkantogadhassa ekekassāpi bhāgassa niyyānassa upanissayattā ekekabhāgavasena niyyānaṃ dassitaṃ. Na hi ekekaṃ vinā niyyānaṃ hotīti.
169 在“短”的解说中,“称为短”是指短暂的时间。其余内容应按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
169. Rassaniddese ittarasaṅkhāteti parittasaṅkhāte kāle. Sesamettha vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
170 在“觉知一切身”的解说中,在无色法里,因为受比较粗显,为了容易把握,所以最先说了能感受可意和不可意所缘的受。然后,以“它感受那个,就认知那个”这样的方式,说了能摄取受的对象行相的想。接着,是依想而造作的思。再接着,依据“触了感受,触了认知,触了思”这个说法,说了触。再接着,是一切法共通的作意。这样,通过思等就说了行蕴。当受、想、行这三蕴这样被说明时,作为它们所依的识蕴也就等于被说明了。以及“名”:就是前面所说的那种名。而“名身”:这是为了排除涅槃和出世间法才说的,因为涅槃也被“名”这个说法包含在内,而出世间法又不能作为观的对象。通过“身”这个说法,涅槃就被排除了,因为涅槃不是积聚。那些被称为心行的:正如“想、受以及心所这些法,系属于心,是心行”这样所说,虽然也可以称为心行,但在这里已经把它们包含在名身里了。大种:因为大显现、大种共相、大周遍、大变异、大成为原因,所以叫大种。它们就是地、水、火、风四种。以及四大种所造色:这是宾格意义上的属格,意思是依赖、依托四大种,不离开它们而生起的色。那又有二十四种:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、色、声、香、味、女根、男根、命根、心所依处、食素、身表、语表、虚空界、色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性、积集、相续、老、无常。以及入息和出息:就是自然本身的。依靠入息出息生起的似相,也得到同样的名称,就像地遍等一样。因为与色相似,所以也得到“色”这个名称,就像“见外面的诸色”等说法里那样。以及相与系缚:就是作为念的系缚处的相,也就是入息出息的接触处。那些被称为身行的:正如“入息出息是身所依的,这些法系属于身,是身行”这样所说,虽然也可以称为身行,但在这里已经把它们包含在色身里了。巴利
170. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvediniddese arūpadhammesu vedanāya oḷārikattā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇasaṃvedikā vedanā vuttā, tato yaṃ vedeti, taṃ sañjānātīti evaṃ vedanāvisayassa ākāraggāhikā saññā, tato saññāvasena abhisaṅkhārikā cetanā, tato ‘‘phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vacanato phasso, tato sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇalakkhaṇo manasikāro, cetanādīhi saṅkhārakkhandho vutto. Evaṃ tīsu khandhesu vuttesu taṃnissayo viññāṇakkhandho vuttova hoti. Nāmañcāti vuttappakāraṃ nāmañca. Nāmakāyo cāti idaṃ pana nāmena nibbānassapi saṅgahitattā lokuttarānañca avipassanupagattā taṃ apanetuṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kāyo’’ti hi vacanena nibbānaṃ apanītaṃ hoti nibbānassa rāsivinimuttattā. Ye ca vuccanti cittasaṅkhārāti ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) evaṃ vuccamānāpi cittasaṅkhārā idha nāmakāyeneva saṅgahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mahābhūtāti mahantapātubhāvato mahābhūtasāmaññato mahāparihārato mahāvikārato mahantabhūtattā cāti mahābhūtā. Te pana – pathavī āpo tejo vāyoti cattāro. Catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāro mahābhūte upādāya nissāya amuñcitvā pavattarūpanti attho. Taṃ pana – cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo rūpaṃ saddo gandho raso itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ hadayavatthu ojā kāyaviññatti vacīviññatti ākāsadhātu rūpassa lahutā mudutā kammaññattā upacayo santati jaratā aniccatāti catuvīsatividhaṃ. Assāso ca passāso cāti pākatikoyeva. Assāsapassāse nissāya uppannaṃ paṭibhāganimittampi tadeva nāmaṃ labhati pathavīkasiṇādīni viya. Rūpasarikkhakattā rūpanti ca nāmaṃ labhati ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 204; dī. ni. 3.338) viya. Nimittañca upanibandhanāti satiupanibandhanāya nimittabhūtaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ phusanaṭṭhānaṃ. Ye ca vuccanti kāyasaṅkhārāti ‘‘assāsapassāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.463) evaṃ vuccamānāpi kāyasaṅkhārā idha rūpakāyeneva saṅgahitāti vuttaṃ hoti.
这些身是在三个时刻被通达的:在禅那的刹那,入出息相所成的身是作为所缘而被通达的;在观的刹那,其余的色身和非色身也是作为所缘而被通达的;在道的刹那,则是以无迷乱的方式被通达的。至于“长入出息”等说法,是针对那位依入出息证得禅那的修行者,在他生起的观与道中也同样适用而说的。巴利
Tekāyā paṭividitā hontīti jhānakkhaṇe assāsapassāsanimittakāyā vipassanākkhaṇe avasesarūpārūpakāyā ārammaṇato paṭividitā honti, maggakkhaṇe asammohato paṭividitā honti. Assāsapassāsavasena paṭiladdhajjhānassa yogissa uppannavipassanāmaggepi sandhāya dīghaṃ assāsapassāsavasenātiādi vuttaṃ.
“转向而了知”等说法,其含义已经在戒论中讲过了。把那些所说的各种身都纳入“身”的范围内,所以说“觉知一切身”。巴利
Āvajjato pajānatotiādīni sīlakathāyaṃ vuttatthāni. Te vuttappakāre kāye antokaritvā ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti vuttaṃ.
在“觉知一切身”等说法里,对于从所说的“觉知一切身”的入出息所生起的禅那、观和道来说,防护本身就是以防护为含义的戒清净;不散乱本身就是以不散乱为含义的心清净;慧本身就是以见为含义的见清净。应当知道,即使在禅那和观当中并没有真正意义上的远离,只要没有恶法,这本身就叫作防护。巴利
Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assāsapassāsānaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhenātiādīsu ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī’’tivuttaassāsapassāsato uppannajjhānavipassanāmaggesu saṃvaroyeva saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlavisuddhi. Avikkhepoyeva avikkhepaṭṭhena cittavisuddhi. Paññāyeva dassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhivisuddhi. Jhānavipassanāsu viratiabhāvepi pāpābhāvamattameva saṃvaro nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
171 在解释“令平息”等语时,“身内的”指存在于色身之中的。“系属于身”指与身相连、依身而住;身体存在时它们才存在,身体不存在时它们就不存在。正因如此,它们由身体所造作,所以称为“身行”。“令平息”就是令它熄灭、令它沉静。单说“平息”这个词,就已经包含了粗重身行的平息。“令灭”是通过不让粗重身行生起来灭除它们。“令寂止”是对粗重身行,仅以将其导向单一相续状态的方式,使其达到寂静。“学”——应依“以所作之事为关联”来理解,即与“我将会吸气”相连而学;或者,意思是修学三学。巴利
171.Passambhayantiādīnaṃ niddese kāyikāti rūpakāye bhavā. Kāyapaṭibaddhāti kāyaṃ paṭibaddhā kāyaṃ nissitā, kāye sati honti, asati na honti, tasmāyeva te kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Passambhentoti nibbāpento sannisīdāpento. Passambhanavacaneneva oḷārikānaṃ passambhanaṃ siddhaṃ. Nirodhentoti oḷārikānaṃ anuppādanena nirodhento. Vūpasamentoti oḷārikeyeva ekasantatipariṇāmanayena santabhāvaṃ nayanto. Sikkhatīti adhikāravasena assasissāmīti sikkhatīti sambandho, tisso sikkhā sikkhatīti vā attho.
现在,为了说明粗重身行的平息,而说“如同那些……”等。在这里,“如同那些”是指什么样的。“向后弯”是向后方弯曲。“向侧弯”是向两边弯曲。“善弯”是指对正在弯曲的,从一切处充分地弯曲。“向前弯”是向前方弯曲。“动摇”是指摇晃。“微动”是指轻微移动。“剧动”是指剧烈摇晃。应当这样连接语义:如同哪些身行会令身体表现出向后弯……乃至剧动,便平息那样的身行;并且,身体所有的向后弯……乃至剧动,那些也都被平息了。因为当身行被平息时,身体的向后弯等也就自然被平息了。又应通过以下连接来理解:如同哪些身行会令身体不产生向后弯等,便平息那样寂静、微细的身行;并且,身体那无向后弯等的状态,即是寂静、微细的,这也被平息了。“寂静、微细”是一个表示修习语态的中性词。这里,在“iti kira”中,iti 是“如此”的意思,kira 是“如果”的意思。意思是:如若如此,他仍在平息着极其微细的入出息而学习“我当吸入,我当呼出”——这是责难者所发起的责难。或者,“kira”一词因为属于责难者的话,所以确实适用于不信任、不能忍受、非现见的含义,也就是说:我不相信、我不能忍受、这不是我现见的——他仍在学习平息极其微细的入出息。巴利
Idāni oḷārikapassambhanaṃ dassetuṃ yathārūpehītiādimāha. Tattha yathārūpehīti yādisehi. Ānamanāti pacchato namanā. Vinamanāti ubhayapassato namanā. Sannamanāti sabbatopi namantassa suṭṭhu namanā. Paṇamanāti purato namanā. Iñjanāti kampanā. Phandanāti īsakaṃ calanā. Pakampanāti bhusaṃ kampanā. Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa ānamanā…pe… pakampanā, tathārūpaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhayanti ca, yā kāyassa ānamanā…pe… pakampanā, tañca passambhayanti ca sambandho kātabbo. Kāyasaṅkhāresu hi passambhitesu kāyassa ānamanādayo ca passambhitāyeva hontīti. Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa na ānamanādikā hoti, tathārūpaṃ santaṃ sukhumampi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhayanti ca, yā kāyassa na ānamanādikā, tañca santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayanti ca sambandhato veditabbaṃ. Santaṃ sukhumanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakavacanametaṃ. Iti kirāti ettha iti evamatthe, kira yadiatthe. Yadi evaṃ sukhumakepi assāsapassāse passambhayaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti codakena codanā āraddhā hoti. Atha vā kirāti codakavacanattā asaddahanatthe asahanatthe parokkhatthe ca yujjatiyeva, evaṃ sukhumānampi passambhanaṃ sikkhatīti na saddahāmi na sahāmi apaccakkhaṃ meti vuttaṃ hoti.
“如此存在时”:当这样微细的(入出息)平息而存在时。“而且对风的执取不发生”:对入出息风的执取不发生。“执取”就是识。对于正在执取入出息风、以它为所缘的修习识来说,那时它的生起、产生不发生;意思是,对那个所缘的修习不发生。“而且入出息不发生”:因为在修习中,连那些微细的入出息也被灭尽,所以它们的生起、转起不发生——这是含义。“而且入出息念不发生”:正因为入出息不存在,那时以入出息为所缘、与修习识相应的念的转起不发生。因此,与它相应的入出息念定的修习也不发生。在这里,“ca naṃ”中的“naṃ”只是小品词,就像“比丘且不……”等句中的用法一样。应这样连接:智者既不以所说的方式进入那种等至,也不从那种等至中出定。在驳斥责难者的话中,“iti kira”正是这个意思。这里应把“kira”理解为“正是”的意思。“如此存在时”:正是当这样的平息存在时。巴利
Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sukhumānaṃ passambhane sante. Vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hotīti assāsapassāsavātassa upaladdhiyā. Upaladdhīti viññāṇaṃ. Assāsapassāsavātaṃ upalabbhamānassa tadārammaṇassa bhāvanāviññāṇassa pabhāvanā uppādanā na hoti, tassa ārammaṇassa bhāvanā na hotīti attho. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hotīti bhāvanāya sukhumakānampi assāsapassāsānaṃ nirodhanato tesañca uppādanā pavattanā na hotīti attho. Ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hotīti assāsapassāsābhāvatoyeva tadārammaṇāya bhāvanāviññāṇasampayuttāya satiyā ca pavattanā na hoti. Tasmāyeva taṃsampayuttassa ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca bhāvanā na hoti. Na ca naṃ tanti ettha ca nanti nipātamattaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu ca na’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 273) viya. Taṃ vuttavidhiṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā na samāpajjantipi tato na vuṭṭhahantipīti sambandho. Codanāpakkhassa parihāravacane iti kirāti evameva. Ettha evakāratthe kirasaddo daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ passambhane sante eva.
“就像怎样呢?”这是在问那个譬喻:按照所说的那种方式,它到底是怎样的呢?现在用“犹如”来引出那个譬喻。“铜器”是指铜制的器皿。“相”是指那些声音的行相。这里的“相”是以属格意义来用的对格,意思是“声音的相”。声音相和声音本身并没有不同。“因善执取故”是因为很好地执取了;也有写成“sugahitattā”的读法,意思是很好地抓住了。“因善作意故”是因为很好地注意了。“因善持于心故”是因为很好地安置于心中。“因有微细声相为所缘故”是说:那时连微细的声音也已经息灭,所以即便该未执取的声音相已无所缘,心仍然转而以更微细的声音相为所缘;或者说,心具有以更微细声音相为所缘的状态。按照这一方法,对于安止定的道理也应当这样理解。巴利
Yathā kathaṃ viyāti yathā taṃ vuttavidhānaṃ hoti, tathā taṃ kathaṃ viyāti upamaṃ pucchati. Idāni seyyathāpīti taṃ upamaṃ dasseti. Kaṃseti kaṃsamayabhājane. Nimittanti tesaṃ saddānaṃ ākāraṃ. ‘‘Nimitta’’nti ca sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ, nimittassāti attho. Saddanimittañca saddato anaññaṃ. Suggahitattāti suṭṭhu uggahitattā. Sugahitattātipi pāṭho, suṭṭhu gahitattāti attho. Sumanasikatattāti suṭṭhu āvajjitattā. Sūpadhāritattāti suṭṭhu citte ṭhapitattā. Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti tadā sukhumānampi saddānaṃ niruddhattā anuggahitasaddanimittassa anārammaṇampi sukhumataraṃ saddanimittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā sukhumataraṃ saddanimittārammaṇampi cittaṃ pavattati, sukhumatarasaddanimittārammaṇabhāvatopīti vā attho. Imināva nayena appanāyampi attho veditabbo.
在“令平息”等句中,应当这样理解它们的关联:所谓“令身行平息”中的入出息就是身;或者说,在“令身行平息”这句话里,入出息指的就是身。当修行者通过修习的清净而使身行平息时,如果他提起作意:“我要平息这粗重的身行”,凭着这份精勤专注,身行就会变得极其平息。即使他没有刻意提起作意,那微细的身行也会自然地变得容易把握。巴利
Passambhayantiādīsu ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti vuttā assāsapassāsā kāyoti vā ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti ettha assāsapassāsā kāyoti vā yojanā veditabbā. Bhāvanāvisuddhiyā kāyasaṅkhāre passambhamānepi oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhemīti yogino ābhoge sati tenādarena ativiya passambhati. Anupaṭṭhahantampi sukhumaṃ suānayaṃ hoti.
八种观智:在“长息、短息、觉知全身、平息身行”这四种所依中,依入息有四种,依出息有四种,合起来就是八种观智。八种现起念:依照《无碍解道》“了知长入息时,心一境性、无散乱,念就现起”这样的方式,在这四种所依中,依入息有四种,依出息有四种,合起来就是八种现起念。也可以读作“aṭṭha cupaṭṭhānānussatiyo”(八种现起念)。四种经教所说之处:因为世尊在《入出息念经》等经中已经开示,所以依第一个四法组来说,有四种经教所说之处。巴利
Aṭṭhaanupassanāñāṇānīti ‘‘dīghaṃ rassaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti vuttesu catūsu vatthūsu assāsavasena catasso, passāsavasena catassoti aṭṭha anupassanāñāṇāni. Aṭṭha ca upaṭṭhānānussatiyoti ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hotī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.170) nayena vuttesu catūsu vatthūsu assāsavasena catasso, passāsavasena catassoti aṭṭha ca upaṭṭhānānussatiyo. Aṭṭha cupaṭṭhānānussatiyotipi pāṭho. Cattāri suttantikavatthūnīti bhagavatā ānāpānassatisuttante (ma. ni. 3.144 ādayo) vuttattā paṭhamacatukkavasena cattāri suttantikavatthūnīti.
172 在解说第二组四法中的“觉知喜”时,说到“喜与欢悦生起”,这里的“喜”是根本词,“欢悦”是它的释义,意思是欢喜的状态。在“喜与欢悦”等说法中,凡是得到“喜”“欢悦”等名称的,就是这里所说的喜。其中,“喜”是自性词。欢喜者的状态就是欢悦。欢喜的样态是喜悦,令欢喜的样态是喜乐。又比如,把各种药、各种油,或者温水凉水混合在一起,这叫作“混合”;同样,这个法也因为融合诸法而称为“混合”,再加上前缀修饰,就说成“喜悦”和“喜乐”。能让人笑的是“笑”,能让人大大欢喜的是“极笑”,这些都是欢喜踊跃状态的同义词。“vitti”是“vitta”,这是财富的名称。但在这里,因为它是喜悦的缘,与财富相似,所以称为“喜慰”。就像富人依凭财富而生起喜悦,具足喜的人也依凭喜而生起喜悦,因此称为“喜慰”。也就是说,这是立足于满足自性的喜的名称。而具足喜的人,因为身心提升、昂扬,所以称为“昂扬者”;昂扬者的状态就是昂扬。自己心意满足就是心悦。心不欢喜的人,因为心处于苦的所缘,所以不算自己的心;心欢喜的人,因为心处于乐的所缘,所以算自己的心。因此,自己心意满足就是心悦,也就是自己心意满足、自己心意存在的意思。不过,这并不是对别的什么人自己心意满足,而只是心的状态,是心所法,所以说“心悦是心的”。其余部分,在这里以及上面、下面,都应按照已说的方法配合理解。巴利
172. Dutiyacatukkassa pītipaṭisaṃvediniddese uppajjati pīti pāmojjanti ettha pītīti mūlapadaṃ. Pāmojjanti tassa atthapadaṃ, pamuditabhāvoti attho. Yā pīti pāmojjantiādīsu yā ‘‘pītī’’ti ca ‘‘pāmojja’’nti ca evamādīni nāmāni labhati, sā pītīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha pītīti sabhāvapadaṃ. Pamuditassa bhāvo pāmojjaṃ. Āmodanākāro āmodanā. Pamodanākāro pamodanā. Yathā vā bhesajjānaṃ vā telānaṃ vā uṇhodakasītodakānaṃ vā ekatokaraṇaṃ modanāti vuccati, evamayampi dhammānaṃ ekatokaraṇena modanā, upasaggavasena pana padaṃ maṇḍetvā āmodanā pamodanāti vuttaṃ. Hāsetīti hāso, pahāsetīti pahāso, haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākārānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vittīti vittaṃ, dhanassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ayaṃ pana somanassapaccayattā vittisarikkhatāya vitti. Yathā hi dhanino dhanaṃ paṭicca somanassaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ pītimatopi pītiṃ paṭicca somanassaṃ uppajjati. Tasmā ‘‘vittī’’ti vuttā. Tuṭṭhisabhāvasaṇṭhitāya hi pītiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Pītimā pana puggalo kāyacittānaṃ uggatattā abbhuggatattā ‘‘udaggo’’ti vuccati, udaggassa bhāgo odagyaṃ. Attano manatā attamanatā. Anabhiraddhassa hi mano dukkhapadaṭṭhānattā na attano mano nāma hoti, abhiraddhassa sukhapadaṭṭhānattā attano mano nāma hoti, iti attano manatā attamanatā, sakamanatā sakamanassa bhāvoti attho. Sā pana yasmā na aññassa kassaci attano manatā, cittasseva paneso bhāvo cetasiko dhammo, tasmā attamanatā cittassāti vuttā. Sesamettha ca upari ca heṭṭhā vuttanayena yojetvā veditabbaṃ.
173 在解说“体验乐”这一部分时,说“两种乐”,是为了指出止和观的所依基础。因为身乐是观的所依基础,心乐则既是止的所依基础,也是观的所依基础。所谓“身的”,是说它不依靠净色身就无法生起,所以归属于身。所谓“心的”,是说不与心分离,所以归属于心。在这里,用“身的”这个词排除了心乐,用“乐”这个词排除了身苦。同样,用“心的”这个词排除了身乐,用“乐”这个词排除了心苦。“可意的”是指甘甜的、极其甘甜的。“乐”纯粹是乐,而非苦。“身触所生”是指于身触中所生。“可意乐受”是指可意的受,非不可意的受;是乐受,非苦受。接下来的三个词是依阴性形式说的:可意受,非不可意;乐受,非苦受。在此正是此义。巴利
173. Sukhapaṭisaṃvediniddese dve sukhānīti samathavipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāyikañhi sukhaṃ vipassanāya bhūmi, cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ samathassa ca vipassanāya ca bhūmi. Kāyikanti pasādakāyaṃ vinā anuppattito kāye niyuttanti kāyikaṃ. Cetasikanti avippayogavasena cetasi niyuttanti cetasikaṃ. Tattha kāyikapadena cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭikkhipati, sukhapadena kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Tathā cetasikapadena kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭikkhipati, sukhapadena cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Sātanti madhuraṃ sumadhuraṃ. Sukhanti sukhameva, na dukkhaṃ. Kāyasamphassajanti kāyasamphasse jātaṃ. Sātaṃ sukhaṃvedayitanti sātaṃ vedayitaṃ, na asātaṃ vedayitaṃ. Sukhaṃ vedayitaṃ, na dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ. Parato tīṇi padāni itthiliṅgavasena vuttāni. Sātā vedanā, na asātā. Sukhā vedanā, na dukkhāti ayameva panettha attho.
关于心乐的解说,应当按前面所说的、与它相反的那一类来对应理解。原文说“那些乐”(te sukhā),这是词性上弄错了,实际要表达的是“那些种种的乐”(tāni sukhāni)。这个四法组里剩下的内容,都应当依照前面第一个四法组所讲的方式来理解。四种经教所说之处,也应当依照这第二个四法组来理解。巴利
Cetasikasukhaniddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena yojetabbo. Te sukhāti liṅgavipallāso kato, tāni sukhānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha catukke heṭṭhā paṭhamacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Cattāri suttantikavatthūni dutiyacatukkavasena veditabbānīti.
176 在第三组四法的解说里,“心”是根本词,“识”是释义词。“那种心”等说法,应按照前面讲“喜”时的方式连接理解。其中,在“心”等名称里,因为心的种种差别状态,所以叫“心”;它衡量、了知所缘,所以叫“意”;“意”就是意本身。正如“在空中游行的罗网,这个游行者就是意”所说,在这里,与意相应之法被称为“意”。巴利
176. Tatiyacatukkaniddese cittanti mūlapadaṃ. Viññāṇanti atthapadaṃ. Yaṃ cittantiādi pītiyaṃ vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Tattha cittantiādīsu cittavicittatāya cittaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ minamānaṃ jānātīti mano. Mānasanti manoyeva. ‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33) hi ettha pana sampayuttakadhammo mānasoti vutto.
世尊,您的弟子怎么会不乐于您的教法呢?
尚未证得阿罗汉果的有学,若在人们所闻之中死去。巴利
‘‘Kathañhi bhagavā tuyhaṃ, sāvako sāsane rato; Appattamānaso sekkho, kālaṃ kayirā jane sutā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.159) –
这里说阿罗汉果是慢。但在这个语境里,意本身就是心。这个词只是为了音节需要而扩展出来的。巴利
Ettha arahattaṃ mānasanti vuttaṃ. Idha pana manova mānasaṃ. Byañjanavasena hetaṃ padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
“心脏”就是指心。在“我要打碎你的心,或者撕裂你的心脏”这句话里,说的是胸膛为心脏。在“以心知心,我想,就像用另一颗心去切割一样”这句话里,指的是心。在“肾脏、心脏”里,指的是心脏这个所依处。但在这里,是就内在的含义而说心本身就是“心脏”。这心因为清净,所以是“洁白”的。这是就有分心而说的。正如经文所说:“诸比丘,此心是光净的,但它被外来的随烦恼所染污。”不过,从它生起的不善心,也像从恒河流出的河仍叫恒河、从戈陀瓦利河流出的河仍叫戈陀瓦利河一样,因此也就随顺着叫“洁白”。再者,因为了知所缘是心的特相,它不会因为染污就变成烦恼,它的自性本来就是清净的;只是当与染污结合时,才被称为染污。因此,说它是“洁白”也是合适的。巴利
Hadayanti cittaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ vā te khipissāmi, hadayaṃ vā te phālessāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237; su. ni. āḷavakasutta) ettha uro hadayanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāya tacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.63) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Vakkaṃ hadaya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110) ettha hadayavatthu. Idha pana cittameva abbhantaraṭṭhena ‘‘hadaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Tadeva parisuddhaṭṭhena paṇḍaraṃ. Bhavaṅgaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49). Tato nikkhantattā pana akusalampi gaṅgāya nikkhantā nadī gaṅgā viya, godhāvarito nikkhantā godhāvarī viya ca ‘‘paṇḍara’’ntveva vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana ārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ cittaṃ upakkilesena kileso na hoti, sabhāvato parisuddhameva hoti, upakkilesayoge pana sati upakkiliṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, tasmāpi ‘‘paṇḍara’’nti vattuṃ yujjati.
这里取“意”来指“意处”,是为了说明意本身就是处。由此表明:并不是像“天处”因是诸天的处所而得名那样,因是意的处所而叫“意处”,而是意本身就是处,所以叫“意处”。巴利
Mano manāyatananti idha pana manogahaṇaṃ manasseva āyatanabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti – ‘‘nayidaṃ devāyatanaṃ viya manassa āyatanattā manāyatanaṃ, atha kho mano eva āyatanaṃ manāyatana’’nti.
“处”的含义,前面已经说过。它思量,所以叫“意”,意思是它了知。不过,注疏师们说:就像用斗量、用大秤称一样,它了知所缘,所以叫“意”。正是这个意,以思量为特征,起到“根”的作用,所以叫“根”。意就是根,所以叫“意根”。巴利
Āyatanaṭṭho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Manate iti mano, vijānātīti attho. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – nāḷiyā minamāno viya mahātulāya dhārayamāno viya ca ārammaṇaṃ jānātīti mano, tadeva mananalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, manova indriyaṃ manindriyaṃ.
“了知”,所以是识。识本身就是蕴,所以是识蕴。这是依照惯用法而说为“蕴”。因为从积聚的意义来说,识蕴的一部分就是单独一个识。因此,就像砍下树的一部分时,人们会说“在砍树”,同样,作为识蕴一部分的哪怕只是一个识,依照惯用法也被说为“识蕴”。不过,因为积聚之义并不就是蕴之义,部分之义才是蕴之义,所以从部分之义来说,也有“识的部分”这个意思。与那些触等相应法相合的意界,就是“彼等之意识界”。在这个词句里,同一个心,以衡量的意义来说是意,以了知的意义来说是识,以自性的意义或没有众生的意义来说是界,所以用三个名称来说它。巴利
Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Viññāṇameva khandho viññāṇakkhandho. Ruḷhito khandho vutto. Rāsaṭṭhena hi viññāṇakkhandhassa ekadeso ekaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Tasmā yathā rukkhassa ekadesaṃ chindanto rukkhaṃ chindatīti vuccati, evameva viññāṇakkhandhassa ekadesabhūtaṃ ekampi viññāṇaṃ ruḷhito ‘‘viññāṇakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana rāsaṭṭhoyeva khandhaṭṭho na hoti, koṭṭhāsaṭṭhopi khandhaṭṭhoyeva, tasmā koṭṭhāsaṭṭhena viññāṇakoṭṭhāsotipi attho. Tajjā manoviññāṇadhātūti tesaṃ phassādīnaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ anucchavikā manoviññāṇadhātu. Imasmiñhi pade ekameva cittaṃ minanaṭṭhena mano, vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ, sabhāvaṭṭhena, nissattaṭṭhena vā dhātūti tīhi nāmehi vuttaṃ.
极度欢喜,即更强的满足感。巴利
Abhippamodoti adhikā tuṭṭhi.
178 在“定”的解说中,以不动摇的方式安住在所缘上,这叫“住立”。后面两个词是通过前缀来扩展词义的。再者,能把相应诸法聚集到所缘上并安住下来,这叫“等住”。深深进入所缘、完全渗透进去之后安住下来,这叫“安住”。在善法这一边,有四种法能深入所缘,就是信、念、定、慧。因此,信被称为“信入”,念被称为“不漂浮”,定被称为“安住”,慧被称为“遍入”。在不善法这一边,有三种法能深入所缘,就是贪、见、无明。因此,它们被称为“暴流”。“不散乱”是与因掉举和疑而产生的散乱心相对立的,意思是心不被四处拉扯、不散失。正是因为掉举和疑,行进中的心才被称为散乱;但此定不是这样,所以叫“不散乱”。正是因为掉举和疑,心才被称为散失,被一会儿拉到这里、一会儿拉到那里;而此定是拥有不散失的心态,所以叫“不散失心态”。巴利
178. Samādhiniddese acalabhāvena ārammaṇe tiṭṭhatīti ṭhiti. Parato padadvayaṃ upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitaṃ . Apica sampayuttadhamme ārammaṇamhi sampiṇḍetvā tiṭṭhatīti saṇṭhiti. Ārammaṇaṃ ogāhetvā anupavisitvā tiṭṭhatīti avaṭṭhiti. Kusalapakkhasmiṃ hi cattāro dhammā ārammaṇaṃ ogāhanti saddhā sati samādhi paññāti. Teneva saddhā ‘‘okappanā’’ti vuttā, sati ‘‘apilāpanatā’’ti, samādhi ‘‘avaṭṭhitī’’ti, paññā ‘‘pariyogāhanā’’ti. Akusalapakkhe pana tayo dhammā ārammaṇaṃ ogāhanti taṇhā diṭṭhi avijjāti. Teneva te ‘‘oghā’’ti vuttā. Uddhaccavicikicchāvasena pavattassa visāhārassa paṭipakkhato avisāhāro, avisāharaṇanti attho. Uddhaccavicikicchāvaseneva gacchantaṃ cittaṃ vikkhipati nāma, ayaṃ pana tathā na hotīti avikkhepo. Uddhaccavicikicchāvaseneva cittaṃ visāhaṭaṃ nāma hoti, ito cito ca harīyati, ayaṃ pana avisāhaṭassa mānasassa bhāvoti avisāhaṭamānasatā.
奢摩他(止)有三种:心止、灭诤止、一切行止。其中,在八等至中的心一境性,叫做心止。因为依靠它,心的动摇、心的挣扎就止息、平静下来,所以它被称为心止。现前毗尼等七种灭诤,叫做灭诤止。因为依靠它,种种诤事就止息、平静下来,所以它被称为灭诤止。然而,因为一切行依靠涅槃而止息、平静下来,所以它被称为一切行止。在这里,所指的就是心止。在定的特相中发挥根的作用,所以叫定根。在掉举中不动摇,所以叫定力。正定,是如实之定、导向出离之定、善定,巴利
Samathoti tividho samatho cittasamatho adhikaraṇasamatho sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti. Tattha aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu cittekaggatā cittasamatho nāma. Tañhi āgamma cittacalanaṃ cittavipphandanaṃ sammati vūpasammati, tasmā so ‘‘cittasamatho’’ti vuccati. Sammukhāvinayādisattavidho adhikaraṇasamatho nāma. Tañhi āgamma tāni tāni adhikaraṇāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā so ‘‘adhikaraṇasamatho’’ti vuccati. Yasmā pana sabbe saṅkhārā nibbānaṃ āgamma sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā taṃ sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti vuccati. Imasmiṃ atthe cittasamatho adhippeto. Samādhilakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti samādhindriyaṃ. Uddhacce na kampatīti samādhibalaṃ. Sammāsamādhīti yāthāvasamādhi niyyānikasamādhi kusalasamādhi.
179 通过“从贪欲中解脱心”等说法,宣说了从十种烦恼事中解脱。这里,说到昏沉就已经包含了睡眠,说到掉举就已经包含了后悔,因为它们在别的经典中是相伴而起的。同样,通过从初禅等从盖等烦恼事中解脱的说法,以及通过无常随观等从常想等中解脱的说法,也已经宣说了。在“如何随观心”等省略段落中,确实宣说了通过无常随观等断除常想等。应当知道,四种经说事是依第三组四法而建立的。巴利
179.Rāgato vimocayaṃ cittantiādīhi dasahi kilesavatthūhi vimocanaṃ vuttaṃ. Thinaggahaṇeneva cettha middhaggahaṇaṃ, uddhaccaggahaṇeneva ca kukkuccaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ hotīti aññesu pāṭhesu sahacārittā kilesavatthuto vimocanavacaneneva paṭhamajjhānādīhi nīvaraṇādito vimocanaṃ, aniccānupassanādīhi niccasaññādito ca vimocanaṃ vuttameva hotīti. Kathaṃ taṃ cittaṃ anupassatīti ettha peyyāle ca aniccānupassanādīhi niccasaññādīnaṃ pahānaṃ vuttameva. Cattāri suttantikavatthūni tatiyacatukkavasena veditabbānīti.
180 在第四组四法的解说中,因为说了“未指明时用中性词”,而“某某”没有指明,所以用中性词来提问:“无常,什么是无常?”以生灭之义,就是由称为生灭的意义,也就是以生灭为自性。在这里,五蕴是自性相,五蕴的生灭是变异相。通过这一点,就以“有而后消失”来说无常。正因为如此,注疏中也说:“依有为相而说无常性,就是那些生灭与变异性”,又说:“或者是有而后消失”。由此宣示:有而后消失的行相就是无常相。以略说方式说:“观察五蕴的生灭者,这些是慧的相。”法是如前所说的色蕴等法。巴利
180. Catutthacatukkaniddese ‘‘aniddiṭṭhe napuṃsaka’’nti vacanato asukanti aniddiṭṭhattā ‘‘aniccanti kiṃ anicca’’nti napuṃsakavacanena pucchā katā. Uppādavayaṭṭhenāti uppādavayasaṅkhātena atthena, uppādavayasabhāvenāti attho. Ettha ca pañcakkhandhā sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ uppādavayā vikāralakkhaṇaṃ. Etena hutvā abhāvena aniccāti vuttaṃ hoti. Teneva ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saṅkhatalakkhaṇavasena aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathatta’’nti ca vatvāpi ‘‘hutvā abhāvo vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etena hutvā abhāvākāro aniccalakkhaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ passanto imāni paññāya lakkhaṇānī’’ti peyyālaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Dhammāti rūpakkhandhādayo yathāvuttadhammā.
在“随观离贪”的解说中,“见色的过患”是指:从坏灭随观开始,依照后面所说的无常等义,见到色蕴的过患。“色的离贪”是指涅槃。因为依止涅槃,色就离贪,由于达到不再生起的法性而灭尽,所以涅槃被称为“色的离贪”。“生起了欲求”是指通过听闻而于法生起欲求。“以信胜解”是指对那涅槃以信而胜解、确定。“他的心善加安住”应当联系上下文来理解:这位瑜伽行者的心,以尽灭离贪所摄的色坏灭为所缘,并以听闻的方式于毕竟离贪所摄的色离贪即涅槃上善加安住、善加住立。“于色随观离贪”:色的尽灭离贪,以处所格说为“于色中的离贪”;色的毕竟离贪,以目标格说为“朝向色的离贪”。以这两种离贪为所缘、以之为心的倾向而随观修习的人,就称为“于色随观离贪者”。对受等诸蕴,道理也是如此。在“随观灭”这一词的解说中,道理同样如此。巴利
Virāgānupassīniddese rūpe ādīnavaṃ disvāti bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya parato vuttehi aniccaṭṭhādīhi rūpakkhandhe ādīnavaṃ disvā. Rūpavirāgeti nibbāne. Nibbānañhi āgamma rūpaṃ virajjati apunaruppattidhammataṃ āpajjanena nirujjhati, tasmā nibbānaṃ ‘‘rūpavirāgo’’ti vuccati. Chandajāto hotīti anussavavasena uppannadhammacchando hoti. Saddhādhimuttoti tasmiṃyeva nibbāne saddhāya ca adhimutto nicchito. Cittañcassa svādhiṭṭhitanti assa yogissa cittaṃ khayavirāgasaṅkhāte rūpabhaṅge ārammaṇavasena , accanta virāgasaṅkhāte rūpavirāge nibbāne anussavavasena suṭṭhu adhiṭṭhitaṃ suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitaṃ hotīti sambandhato veditabbaṃ. Rūpe virāgānupassīti rūpassa khayavirāgo rūpe virāgoti pakatibhummavacanena vutto. Rūpassa accantavirāgo rūpe virāgoti nimittatthe bhummavacanena vutto. Taṃ duvidhampi virāgaṃ ārammaṇato ajjhāsayato ca anupassanasīlo ‘‘rūpe virāgānupassī’’ti vutto. Esa nayo vedanādīsu. Nirodhānupassīpadaniddesepi eseva nayo.
181 181. 关于“以多少种行相”等说法,这里的不同之处在于:其中,通过观察无明等缘起支的过患与灭,也就等于显示了色等法的过患与灭,因为色等法也不超出缘起支的范围。正是通过这个区分性的说明,才表明了离贪随观与灭随观相比,具有更殊胜的层面。其中,“以无常义”是指以坏灭义,或者以“存在之后又不存在”之义。“以苦义”是指以怖畏义,或者以逼迫义。“以无我义”是指以无坚实义,或者以不自在义。“以热恼义”是指以烦恼热恼义。“以变易义”是指以老坏而两种变易之义。“以因灭”是指以根本因不存在。“灭”是指不存在。“以集灭”是指以近因不存在。根本因,譬如对疾病来说不适宜的食物,被称为因;近因,譬如对疾病来说风、胆、痰,被称为集。因为因确实决定给予果,所以是因;而集则是果从它很好地生起,所以是集。“以生灭”是指以根本因不生的缘故。“以起灭”是指以近因不生的缘故。因为苦确实从生而起,所以可以说为起。“以因灭”是指以能生因不存在。“以缘灭”是指以资助因不存在。因为根本因、近因、能生因、资助因都存在。由这些,在强观刹那,说为彼分灭;在道刹那,说为断灭。“以智生起”是指以强观智或道智的生起。“以灭现前”是指:在观刹那,以现前坏灭之灭,以及以传闻之力使称为灭的涅槃现前;在道刹那,则以涅槃现前。由这些,就确定了所缘与所缘者的限定,也说了彼分灭与断灭。巴利
181.Katihākārehītiādi panettha viseso – tattha avijjādīnaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ ādīnavanirodhadassaneneva rūpādīnampi ādīnavanirodhā dassitā honti tesampi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānativattanato. Iminā eva ca visesavacanena virāgānupassanato nirodhānupassanāya visiṭṭhabhāvo vutto hoti. Tattha aniccaṭṭhenāti khayaṭṭhena, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena vā. Dukkhaṭṭhenāti bhayaṭṭhena, paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena vā. Anattaṭṭhenāti asārakaṭṭhena, avasavattanaṭṭhena vā. Santāpaṭṭhenāti kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena. Vipariṇāmaṭṭhenāti jarābhaṅgavasena dvidhā pariṇāmanaṭṭhena. Nidānanirodhenāti mūlapaccayābhāvena. Nirujjhatīti na bhavati. Samudayanirodhenāti āsannapaccayābhāvena. Mūlapaccayo hi byādhissa asappāyabhojanaṃ viya nidānanti vutto, āsannapaccayo byādhissa vātapittasemhā viya samudayoti vutto. Nidānañhi nicchayena dadāti phalamiti nidānaṃ, samudayo pana suṭṭhu udeti etasmā phalamiti samudayo. Jātinirodhenāti mūlapaccayassa uppattiabhāvena. Pabhavanirodhenāti āsannapaccayassa uppattiabhāvena. Jātiyeva hi pabhavati etasmā dukkhanti pabhavoti vattuṃ yujjati. Hetunirodhenāti janakapaccayābhāvena. Paccayanirodhenāti upatthambhakapaccayābhāvena. Mūlapaccayopi hi āsannapaccayo ca janakapaccayo upatthambhakapaccayo ca hotiyeva. Etehi tikkhavipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅganirodho, maggakkhaṇe samucchedanirodho vutto hoti. Ñāṇuppādenāti tikkhavipassanāñāṇassa vā maggañāṇassa vā uppādena. Nirodhupaṭṭhānenāti vipassanākkhaṇe paccakkhato khayanirodhassa anussavavasena nirodhasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa upaṭṭhānena, maggakkhaṇe paccakkhato ca nibbānassa upaṭṭhānena. Etehi visayavisayiniyamova kato hoti, tadaṅgasamucchedanirodho ca vutto hoti.
182 在“舍离随观”这一词条的解说中,“他舍弃色”的意思是:由于见到过患而不再期待,因此舍弃色蕴。“舍弃之舍离”是说,以舍弃为含义,所以称为舍离。由此说明了“舍离”一词有舍弃的含义,因此它的意思是断除烦恼。在这里,导向出起的观以彼分断的方式舍弃烦恼,道则以正断的方式舍弃。“心跃入于色灭(涅槃)”:导向出起的观因为倾向于涅槃而跃入,道则以涅槃为所缘而跃入。“跃入之舍离”是说,以跃入为含义,所以称为舍离。由此说明了“舍离”一词有跃入的含义,因此它的意思是心放舍于涅槃。四种经说事应依第四组四法来了知。在此第四组中,关于老死所应说的内容,应依前文所说之理了知。又,在念处中,“于身随观身”“于心随观心”,是把身和心作为同一类称谓而用单数来解说;“于诸受随观受”“于诸法随观法”,是把受和法作为不同类称谓而用复数来解说,应如此了知。巴利
182. Paṭinissaggānupassīpadaniddese rūpaṃ pariccajatīti ādīnavadassanena nirapekkhatāya rūpakkhandhaṃ pariccajati. Pariccāgapaṭinissaggoti pariccāgaṭṭhena paṭinissaggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena paṭinissaggapadassa pariccāgaṭṭho vutto, tasmā kilesānaṃ pajahananti attho. Ettha ca vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanā kilese tadaṅgavasena pariccajati, maggo samucchedavasena. Rūpanirodhe nibbāne cittaṃ pakkhandatīti vuṭṭhānagāminī taṃninnatāya pakkhandati, maggo ārammaṇakaraṇena. Pakkhandanapaṭinissaggoti pakkhandanaṭṭhena paṭinissaggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena paṭinissaggapadassa pakkhandanaṭṭho vutto, tasmā cittassa nibbāne vissajjananti attho. Cattāri suttantikavatthūni catutthacatukkavasena veditabbāni. Imasmiṃ catukke jarāmaraṇe vattabbaṃheṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānesu ca ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanā, citte cittānupassanā’’ti kāyacittānaṃ ekattavohāravasena ekavacananiddeso kato. ‘‘Vedanāsu vedanānupassanā, dhammesu dhammānupassanā’’ti vedanādhammānaṃ nānattavohāravasena bahuvacananiddeso katoti veditabboti.
第六,智蕴轮解说的注释巴利
6. Ñāṇarāsichakkaniddesavaṇṇanā
183 183. 现在,在由六种智蕴所列举的诸智当中,先解说二十四种定智:依照身随观等三组四法,共有十二种事。在每一种事里,以入息为一种定、以出息为一种定,这样各有两种定;于是十二种事中,就有二十四种定。在禅那的刹那,与这些定相应、以二十四种定为依据的诸智,就是二十四种定智。巴利
183. Idāni chahi rāsīhi uddiṭṭhañāṇesu catuvīsatisamādhiñāṇaniddese tāva kāyānupassanādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena dvādasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ ekekasmiṃ assāsavasena eko , passāsavasena ekoti dve dve samādhīti dvādasasu vatthūsu catuvīsati samādhayo honti. Jhānakkhaṇe tehi sampayuttāni catuvīsatisamādhivasena ñāṇāni.
在解说七十二种观智时,“长入息”指的是被称为“长”的那种入息。这话是什么意思呢?就是说:以长入息为条件证得禅那之后,在心得定而修观的刹那,以无常随观之义,称为“观”。其余各处也是同样的道理。就在这十二种事当中,每一种事依入息有三种随观,依出息也有三种随观,这样每一种事就有六种随观;于是十二种事加起来,就有七十二种随观。这七十二种随观,就是七十二种观智。巴利
Dvāsattativipassanāñāṇaniddese dīghaṃ assāsāti ‘‘dīgha’’ntivuttaassāsato. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Dīghaṃ assāsahetu jhānaṃ paṭilabhitvā samāhitena cittena vipassanākkhaṇe aniccato anupassanaṭṭhena vipassanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo uttaratrāpi. Tesaṃyeva dvādasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ ekekasmiṃ assāsavasena tisso, passāsavasena tissoti cha cha anupassanāti dvādasasu vatthūsu dvāsattati anupassanā honti. Tā eva dvāsattati anupassanā dvāsattativipassanāvasena ñāṇāni.
在解说厌离智时,“以无常随观而吸气”,意思是:成为无常随观者而吸气,也就是以无常随观者的状态让吸气持续进行。这里“吸气”这个词应当理解为表示原因。“如实知、如实见”就是厌离智:从对诸法以聚为单位进行思惟开始,一直到坏随观,以在这期间生起的观智如实了知诸行的自性,并且用那智之眼看见,就像用肉眼看东西一样。因此,这叫做厌离智,意思就是对诸行生起厌离的智。由于后面怖畏现起等智以及欲解脱等智是另外单独出现的,所以应当知道,这里只是把如上所说的那些观智称为厌离智。巴利
Nibbidāñāṇaniddese aniccānupassī assasanti aniccānupassī hutvā assasanto, aniccānupassī hutvā vattentoti attho. ‘‘Assasa’’nti ca idaṃ vacanaṃ hetuatthe daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passatīti nibbidāñāṇanti kalāpasammasanato paṭṭhāya yāva bhaṅgānupassanā pavattavipassanāñāṇena saṅkhārānaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ jānāti, cakkhunā diṭṭhamiva ca teneva ñāṇacakkhunā passati. Tasmā nibbidāñāṇaṃ nāmāti attho, saṅkhāresu nibbindañāṇaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upari bhayatūpaṭṭhānādīnaṃ muñcitukamyatādīnañca ñāṇānaṃ visuṃ āgatattā idha yathāvuttāneva vipassanāñāṇāni nibbidāñāṇānīti veditabbāni.
在解说“随顺厌离智”时说到“无常随观者入息”,意思就是:以无常随观者的状态入息。这里用的是属格的意义,却以主格的形式来表达。在“怖畏现起”这个地方,只用“怖畏现起”这个名称,就已经把怖畏现起、过患随观、厌离随观这三种智都说了,因为它们具有同一种特相。这三种智紧接在前面所说的厌离智之后,由于它们有随顺的作用,所以被称为“随顺厌离智”。巴利
Nibbidānulomañāṇaniddese aniccānupassī assasanti aniccānupassino assasantassa. Sāmiatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññātivacaneneva bhayatupaṭṭhānaādīnavānupassanānibbidānupassanāñāṇāni vuttāni honti tiṇṇaṃ ekalakkhaṇattā. Imāni tīṇi ñāṇāni anantarā vuttānaṃ nibbidāñāṇānaṃ anukūlabhāvena anulomato nibbidānulomañāṇānīti vuttāni.
在解说厌离止息智时,“无常随观而入息”这一句,意思和前面所说的基本相同。因为欲解脱智、审察随观智、行舍智这三种智具有相同的特相,所以只用“审察、安住”这个说法就已经把它们都表明了。仅仅通过“审察、安住”这个说法,随顺智和道智也一并被包含进来了。行舍智和随顺智因为已经达到了厌离的顶点,通过舍弃令厌离生起的作用,所以被称为厌离止息智。而道智因为在厌离止息的终点生起,所以被称为厌离止息智,这是非常合理的。这里不像随顺厌离智那样,没有取最初的欲解脱智,而是在最后以“审察、安住”来指称两种智,目的是为了把道智也包含进来。因为如果只说欲解脱,虽然能包含随顺智,但不能包含道智。道智并不叫欲解脱,而是在作用圆满成就时安住,所以叫安住。义注中也说:“触证即是安止。”这道智是对涅槃的安止,所以叫安住;因此通过“安住”这个说法,道智也被包含进来了。那些随顺厌离的智,从意义上说其实就是厌离智,所以把它们也归入厌离智中,统称为厌离止息智,这里只取了“厌离”这个名称,而没有取“随顺厌离”。在这三种智的解说中,按照第四种法随观四组的方式所说的四种对象,每一个对象以入息为一、以出息为一,各有两种智,所以四种对象共有八种智。巴利
Nibbidāpaṭippassaddhiñāṇaniddese aniccānupassī assasanti anantarasadisameva. Paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññātivacaneneva muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaṅkhārupekkhāñāṇāni vuttāni honti tiṇṇaṃ ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā’’tivacaneneva anulomañāṇamaggañāṇānipi gahitāni honti . Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaanulomañāṇānipi hi nibbidāya sikhāppattattā nibbidājananabyāpārappahānena nibbidāpaṭippassaddhiñāṇāni nāma honti. Maggañāṇaṃ pana nibbidāpaṭippassaddhante uppajjanato nibbidāpaṭippassaddhiñāṇaṃ nāma hotīti ativiya yujjatīti. Nibbidānulomañāṇesu viya ādibhūtaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā’’ti ante ñāṇadvayaggahaṇaṃ maggañāṇasaṅgahaṇatthaṃ. Muñcitukamyatāti hi vutte anulomañāṇaṃ saṅgayhati, na maggañāṇaṃ. Maggañāṇañhi muñcitukamyatā nāma na hoti, kiccasiddhiyaṃ santiṭṭhanato pana santiṭṭhanā nāma hoti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ca ‘‘phusanāti appanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idañca maggañāṇaṃ nibbāne appanāti katvā santiṭṭhanā nāma hotīti ‘‘santiṭṭhanā’’tivacanena maggañāṇampi saṅgayhati. Nibbidānulomañāṇānipi atthato nibbidāñāṇāneva hontīti tānipi nibbidāñāṇehi saṅgahetvā nibbidāpaṭippassaddhiñāṇānīti nibbidāgahaṇameva kataṃ, na nibbidānulomaggahaṇaṃ. Tīsupi cetesu ñāṇaṭṭhakaniddesesu catutthassa dhammānupassanācatukkassa vasena vuttānaṃ catunnaṃ vatthūnaṃ ekekasmiṃ assāsavasena ekaṃ, passāsavasena ekanti dve dve ñāṇānīti catūsu vatthūsu aṭṭha ñāṇāni honti.
在解说“解脱乐智”时,先说“已断除”,是为了显示断除;接着为了显示这种断除是彻底的正断,所以说“已彻底断除”。“于解脱乐中的智”,是指与果的解脱乐相应的智,以及以果的解脱乐为所缘的省察智。为了显示:通过断除以随眠为依托的烦恼,也就断除了以缠缚和恶行为依托的烦恼,所以再次说到随眠的断除。针对二十一种果智,以已断烦恼来计数,也就成了智的计数;针对省察智,以对已断烦恼的省察来计数,也就成了对果的省察智的计数。巴利
Vimuttisukhañāṇaniddese pahīnattāti pahānaṃ dassetvā tassa pahānassa samucchedappahānattaṃ dassento samucchinnattāti āha. Vimuttisukhe ñāṇanti phalavimuttisukhasampayuttañāṇañca phalavimuttisukhārammaṇapaccavekkhaṇañāṇañca. Anusayavatthussa kilesassa pahānena pariyuṭṭhānaduccaritavatthuppahānaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ puna anusayānaṃ pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekavīsatiphalañāṇaṃ sandhāya pahīnakilesagaṇanāyapi ñāṇagaṇanā katā hoti, paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca sandhāya pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇagaṇanāya phalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇagaṇanā katā hotīti.